EP3512462A1 - Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods - Google Patents

Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods

Info

Publication number
EP3512462A1
EP3512462A1 EP17851451.9A EP17851451A EP3512462A1 EP 3512462 A1 EP3512462 A1 EP 3512462A1 EP 17851451 A EP17851451 A EP 17851451A EP 3512462 A1 EP3512462 A1 EP 3512462A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
eye
controller
subject
switchable lens
sensor
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
EP17851451.9A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Other versions
EP3512462A4 (en
Inventor
Hon Wah Chin
Roderick A. Hyde
Melanie K. Kitzan
Katherine E. SHARADIN
Clarence T. Tegreene
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Elwha LLC
Original Assignee
Elwha LLC
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US15/267,526 external-priority patent/US10444541B2/en
Priority claimed from US15/358,843 external-priority patent/US20180143455A1/en
Application filed by Elwha LLC filed Critical Elwha LLC
Publication of EP3512462A1 publication Critical patent/EP3512462A1/en
Publication of EP3512462A4 publication Critical patent/EP3512462A4/en
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/16Intraocular lenses
    • A61F2/1613Intraocular lenses having special lens configurations, e.g. multipart lenses; having particular optical properties, e.g. pseudo-accommodative lenses, lenses having aberration corrections, diffractive lenses, lenses for variably absorbing electromagnetic radiation, lenses having variable focus
    • A61F2/1624Intraocular lenses having special lens configurations, e.g. multipart lenses; having particular optical properties, e.g. pseudo-accommodative lenses, lenses having aberration corrections, diffractive lenses, lenses for variably absorbing electromagnetic radiation, lenses having variable focus having adjustable focus; power activated variable focus means, e.g. mechanically or electrically by the ciliary muscle or from the outside
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/16Intraocular lenses
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F2/00Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
    • A61F2/02Prostheses implantable into the body
    • A61F2/14Eye parts, e.g. lenses, corneal implants; Implanting instruments specially adapted therefor; Artificial eyes
    • A61F2/16Intraocular lenses
    • A61F2/1613Intraocular lenses having special lens configurations, e.g. multipart lenses; having particular optical properties, e.g. pseudo-accommodative lenses, lenses having aberration corrections, diffractive lenses, lenses for variably absorbing electromagnetic radiation, lenses having variable focus
    • A61F2/1624Intraocular lenses having special lens configurations, e.g. multipart lenses; having particular optical properties, e.g. pseudo-accommodative lenses, lenses having aberration corrections, diffractive lenses, lenses for variably absorbing electromagnetic radiation, lenses having variable focus having adjustable focus; power activated variable focus means, e.g. mechanically or electrically by the ciliary muscle or from the outside
    • A61F2/1627Intraocular lenses having special lens configurations, e.g. multipart lenses; having particular optical properties, e.g. pseudo-accommodative lenses, lenses having aberration corrections, diffractive lenses, lenses for variably absorbing electromagnetic radiation, lenses having variable focus having adjustable focus; power activated variable focus means, e.g. mechanically or electrically by the ciliary muscle or from the outside for changing index of refraction, e.g. by external means or by tilting
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02CSPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C7/00Optical parts
    • G02C7/02Lenses; Lens systems ; Methods of designing lenses
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02CSPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C7/00Optical parts
    • G02C7/02Lenses; Lens systems ; Methods of designing lenses
    • G02C7/04Contact lenses for the eyes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02CSPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
    • G02C7/00Optical parts
    • G02C7/02Lenses; Lens systems ; Methods of designing lenses
    • G02C7/08Auxiliary lenses; Arrangements for varying focal length
    • G02C7/081Ophthalmic lenses with variable focal length
    • G02C7/083Electrooptic lenses

Definitions

  • Switchable lenses such as intraocular lenses (IOLs) (e.g., pseudophakic IOLs, aphikic IOLs, or phakic IOLs (PIOLS)), contact lenses, and other lenses that are positionable before eyes of a subject can be used to correct the vision of the subject.
  • IOLs intraocular lenses
  • POLS phakic IOLs
  • contact lenses and IOLs can include monofocal, multifocal, or accommodative configurations.
  • IOLs can include an optic element (e.g., lens) and haptic elements (e.g., arms or wings configured to aid in positioning the IOL). Such configurations can be limited to focusing either on near or far vision without selectively modifiable adjustment therebetween.
  • optic element e.g., lens
  • haptic elements e.g., arms or wings configured to aid in positioning the IOL.
  • the lens system also includes a controller operably coupled to the first acceleration sensor and to the second acceleration sensor and operably coupled to the at least one switchable lens device.
  • the controller includes control electrical circuitry configured to receive one or more first signals from the first acceleration sensor, receive one or more second signals from the second acceleration sensor, and generate the one or more switching signals for switching the at least one switchable lens from the first focal length to the second focal length or from the second focal length to the first focal length responsive at least partially to the one or more received first signals from the first acceleration sensor and from the second acceleration sensor.
  • the controller can receive one or more inputs from a user and can switch or direct switching of one or more switchable lenses.
  • the controller can automatically (e.g., without a command from the user or responsive to a signal from one or more sensors detecting a non-command input, event, or condition) switch the switchable lens from a first optical setting to a second optical setting, and can switch back to the first optical setting, from the second optical setting, responsive to an override command or input received from the user (e.g., from the subject wearing the switchable lens).
  • the controller includes control electrical circuitry that is configured to receive one or more sensor signals from the one or more sensors, and direct sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more received sensor signals. Moreover, the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to receive one or more inputs from the subject and, after directing sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the second optical setting, direct override switching of the at least one switchable lens from the at least a second optical setting to the first optical setting at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject.
  • An embodiment includes a lens system that includes at least one switchable lens device including at least one switchable lens configured to selectively switch between a first optical setting and at least a second optical setting, and one or more sensors configured to detect at least one focus-related characteristic of one or more of the first eye or the second eye of the subject or of an environment proximate to the subject.
  • the lens system also includes a controller operably coupled to the one or more sensors and operably coupled to the at least one switchable lens device.
  • the controller includes control electrical circuitry that is configured to receive one or more sensor signals from the one or more sensors and direct sensor-based switching an optical setting of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting or from the second optical setting to the first optical setting responsive to the one or more sensor signals, when a state setting is set to an enabled state, and to maintain the optical setting unchanged, when the state setting is set to a disabled state.
  • the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to receive one or more inputs from the subject and, after sensor-based switching the optical setting of the at least one switchable lens, at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject, change the state setting between a disabled state and an enabled state.
  • the one or more switching signals correspond to a vergence between the eyes, or are otherwise related to a change in vergence between a first eye and a second eye of the subject.
  • the method also includes directing sensor-based switching of at least one switchable lens from a first optical setting to at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more received sensor signals.
  • the method includes after sensor-based switching the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting, receiving one or more inputs from the subject and, at a controller, directing override switching of the at least one switchable lens from the second optical setting to the first optical setting at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject.
  • An embodiment includes a method of changing an optical setting of one or more switchable lens devices.
  • the method includes, at a controller, receiving one or more sensor signals from one or more sensors.
  • the one or more sensor signals are related to a change in vergence between a first eye and a second eye of the subject.
  • the method also includes receiving one or more inputs from the subject and changing a state setting from a disabled state to an enabled state or from an enabled state to a disabled state at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject.
  • the method includes, after changing the states from the disabled state to the enabled state responsive to the one or more user inputs, directing switching an optical setting of at least one switchable lens from a first optical setting to a second optical setting or from the second optical setting to the first optical setting responsive to the one or more sensor signals, when the state setting is set to the enabled state, and to maintaining the optical setting unchanged, when the state setting is set to the disabled state.
  • An embodiment includes a lens system that includes at least one switchable lens device including at least one switchable lens configured to selectively switch between a first optical setting and at least a second optical setting, and one or more sensors configured to detect at least one focus-related characteristic of one or more of a first eye or a second eye of the subject or at least one focus-related characteristic of an environment proximate to the subject.
  • the lens system also includes a controller operably coupled to the one or more sensors and operably coupled to the at least one switchable lens device.
  • the controller includes control electrical circuitry that is configured to receive one or more sensor signals from the one or more sensors, and direct sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more received sensor signals and based on a first algorithm.
  • the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to receive one or more inputs from the subject.
  • the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to, after receiving the one or more inputs from the subject, stop directing sensor-based switching or direct sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more received sensor signals and based on a second algorithm that is different from the first algorithm.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic top view of a subject's eyes having a first vergence therebetween and focused on a first object at a first distance from the subject, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic top view of the subject's eyes of FIG. 1, with the eyes having a second vergence therebetween and are focused on a second object at a second distance from the subject that is less than the first distance, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic side, cross- sectional view of a subject's eye and a switchable lens device located in the eye, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 4A is a top view of a switchable lens device, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 4B is a side view of the switchable lens device of FIG. 4A.
  • FIG. 5A is a schematic top view of a switchable lens system that includes two switchable lens devices oriented by the subject's eyes at a first vergence therebetween, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 5B is a schematic top view of the switchable lens system of FIG. 5A in which the switchable lens devices are oriented by the subject's eyes at a second vergence therebetween, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic front view of a switchable lens system that includes two switchable lens devices oriented by the subject's eyes at a first vergence therebetween, according to yet another embodiment.
  • FIG. 6B is a schematic front view of the switchable lens system of FIG. 7A in which the switchable lens devices are oriented by the subject's eyes at a second vergence therebetween.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a switchable lens system, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic top view of a switchable lens device located in the eye, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 8B is a schematic side view of the switchable lens device of FIG. 3A.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic front view of a switchable lens system worn by a subject, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG.10 is a schematic top view of a switchable lens system, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 11A is a schematic front view of a switchable lens system worn by a subject, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 IB is a schematic top view of the switchable lens system of FIG. 6A.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic front view of a switchable lens system worn by a subject, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic side view of a switchable lens system worn by a subject, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic side view of the switchable lens system, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a switchable lens system, according to an embodiment. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Embodiments disclosed herein are directed to switchable lens devices such as IOL devices and systems, and methods that include determining relative tilt or vergence of a subject's eyes and focusing one or more lenses based on the determined vergence or a change therein.
  • switchable lens devices such as IOL devices and systems
  • methods that include determining relative tilt or vergence of a subject's eyes and focusing one or more lenses based on the determined vergence or a change therein.
  • the switchable lens device can include one or more sensors configured to detect movement of at least one eye of the subject (e.g., to determine a least one of position, velocity, or acceleration of at least on eye of the subject).
  • the switchable lens device can include one or more acceleration sensors that can be operably coupled to or associated with a first eye or a second eye of the subject.
  • a first acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the first eye
  • a second acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the second eye of the subject.
  • the switchable lens system can include at least one switchable lens device (e.g., an IOL device, a contact lens, etc.) that can be positioned in an eye of a subject.
  • the acceleration sensor can be operably connected to the eye of the subject, such as to detect motion of the eye responsive to a vergence of the subject's eyes.
  • the acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to a controller that can direct the switchable lens to change an optical setting (e.g., a focal length) responsive to the output of the acceleration sensor, which is related to the vergence rotation.
  • the accelerometer can detect a change in the velocity of the first eye or of the second eye (e.g., an acceleration of the first or second eye), and the detected changes in the velocity can be related to a vergence between the eyes of the subject.
  • acceleration sensor can include a plurality of accelerometers that can be positioned in or operably coupled to the first eye or the second eye.
  • the plurality of accelerometers e.g., an array of accelerometers
  • the plurality of accelerometers can determine acceleration of the second eye along multiple directions.
  • the controller can receive signals from the plurality of accelerometers and can determine angular acceleration or angular velocity of the first eye or of the second eye.
  • the controller can compare signals received from the accelerometer sensor(s) to distinguish the vergence rotation from tilt rotation of the subject's eyes. For example, acceleration signals having a short duration and representative of higher acceleration of the eyes (e.g., compared to a selected or determined duration or acceleration values) can be associated with the change in vergence. Moreover, in an embodiment, the controller can determine a new focal length (e.g., a focal length to which to switch the switchable lens) responsive to the direction or the angular velocity or acceleration, as determined by the accelerometer(s). Hence, for example, the controller can generate one or more switching signals responsive at least in part to one or more signals received from the accelerometer(s).
  • a new focal length e.g., a focal length to which to switch the switchable lens
  • the switchable device system can include a controller.
  • the controller can be operably coupled to the field sensor and can receive detection output from the sensor. More specifically, the detection outputs from the sensor can be based on the detected change in the field or based on the one or more components thereof, which can be related to vergence rotation between the eyes of the subject.
  • the control can distinguish between vergence rotation of the eyes and co-tilt rotation of the eyes (e.g., when the eyes of the subject tilt in the same direction, such as to view an object located peripherally or to a side of the subject).
  • each switchable lens can act independently of the other, reaching an accurate vergence determination (and hence an accurate focal length determination) on its own, without a need for communication between both of the switchable lenses so as to compare each switchable lens determined tilt with that of the other switchable lens in order to decide which portion of each switchable lens's tilt represents vergence and which represents co-tilt.
  • the switchable lens can be switchable between two or more focal lengths (e.g., a first focal length for distance vision and a second focal length for close-up vision).
  • the switchable lens device can include a single or multiple switchable lenses that can be directed or switched between two or more focal lengths by the controller.
  • the controller can be operably connected to the sensor(s) and can receive outputs therefrom, which can be related to the detected change in the field and, hence, to vergence rotation between the eyes.
  • the controller can switch or direct switching of the switchable lenses at least partially based on the outputs received from the sensor(s) or the one or more signals received from the accelerometer.
  • the switchable lens systems disclosed herein can include one or more sensors configured to detect one or more physiological indicia of the subject.
  • the switchable lens system can include one or more sensors configured to detect glucose concentration (e.g., in the eye of the subject), eye pressure, heart rate, biological proteins present in the eye, or any other biological indicia.
  • the one or more sensors can be operably coupled to the controller.
  • the controller of the switchable lens system can be configured to transmit the measurements of the physical indicia to a remote source such as a computer, a cellular phone, or other electronic device.
  • the measured physical indicia may be used to determine the health of a subject or eye thereof, customize the operation of the switchable lens device to the particular subject, determine if the controller needs to be removed or adjusted, or determine if the focal adjustments of the controller are suitable for the subject.
  • the electronic device may then transmit instructions to the controller to selectively control or otherwise adjust the functioning of the switchable lens system, such as controllably changing the focal length of the switchable lens device.
  • FIG. 1 schematically illustrates eyes 20 and 30 of a subject focused on a first object 10 that is positioned at a first distance from the subject.
  • the switchable lens system 100 can include a first switchable lens device 1 10 positioned in a first eye 20 and a second switchable lens device 110' positioned in a second eye 30 of the subject.
  • the switchable lenses 1 10, 1 10' can be intraocular switchable lenses.
  • the switchable lenses 1 10, 1 10' can be lenses that can be positionable externally to the subject's first and second eyes 20, 30 (e.g., contact lenses).
  • the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10' can be configured to augment or correct visual deficiencies of the subject or to replace the lenses in the respective first eye 20 or second eye 30 of the subject (e.g., in cataract surgeries).
  • the switchable lens system 100 can include only a single switchable lens (e.g., the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10'), which can be positioned in the first eye 20 or in the second eye 30.
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to or set at a first focal length, such that the light entering the eye from the distance of the first object 10 is focused on the retina of the respective eyes 20, 30, thereby focusing the eyes 20, 30 on the first object 10.
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can distinguish between vergence rotation from co-tilt rotation (e.g., when the eyes 20, 30 rotate in the same direction, such as to observe an object located peripherally from the user). As such, for example, the switchable lens device 1 10 or 1 10' can switch focal length responsive to detected vergence rotation. In an embodiment, the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can maintain a previously set focal length during co-tilt of the eyes 20, 30.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic side, cross- sectional view of the eye 20 with the switchable lens device 1 10 implanted therein (e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device), according to an embodiment.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device
  • the switchable lens device 1 10' or its location in the eye 30 can have the same or similar configuration.
  • the eye 20 includes a cornea 21, an iris 22, a natural lens, and a retina 23 therebehind.
  • One or more switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted in the eye 20.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted over the natural lens, in front of (e.g., in the anterior chamber) or behind the iris 22 (e.g., in the posterior chamber), or internal to the natural lens such as in a capsular bag 24 of the natural lens.
  • the natural lens can be absent from the eye 20 (e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 can replace the natural lens and can be placed in the anterior chamber, the posterior chamber, or internal to the capsular bag that is used to contain the natural lens).
  • the switchable lens 1 10 can be any suitable lens that is configured to switch between at least two different optical settings (e.g., between two different focal lengths) responsive to one or more electrical inputs.
  • a controller can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 10 among two or more optical settings.
  • the switchable lens 1 10 can be an electrically-modifiable diffractive lens, as described in more detail in U. S. Application No. 14/807,673, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
  • the switchable lens 1 10 can be liquid crystal lens (e.g., a liquid crystal lens with an electrically tunable focal length).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a lens 1 1 1 and haptics 1 12 connected to or integrated with the lens 1 1 1.
  • the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on or secured to one or more structures in the eye 20, thereby positioning or securing the switchable lens device 1 10 in the eye 20.
  • the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on the ciliary body or muscles or in or on the capsular bag 24 of the natural lens.
  • the lens 1 1 1 can be located laterally in the center of the eye 20 with the haptics 1 12 extending laterally therefrom.
  • the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10 can be switched between two or more focal lengths, to focus light entering the eye from a selected distance on the retina 23 of the eye 20, thereby providing a focus on an object located at the selected focal length and augmenting or correcting the vision of the subject.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include lenses that can be at least partially positionable externally to the subject' s eyes, such as contact lenses.
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be included in or can comprise a contact lens, the can be positionable near the subject' s eye.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be substantially fixed within the eye 20 (e.g., the IOL device can be substantially immobile relative to the optical axis of the eye 20). As such, for example, movement of the eye 20 can result in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10. In particular, as the eye 20 tilts or pivots in the eye socket, the switchable lens device 1 10 can correspondingly tilt or pivot together with the eye 20. Furthermore, one, some, or all of the elements or components of the switchable lens device 1 10 can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye 20 or relative to the optical axis thereof, as described below in more detail.
  • FIGS 4A and 4B illustrate switchable lens device 1 10, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 4A is a top view of the switchable lens device 1 10, and
  • FIG. 4B is a side view of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be configured to fit in or on one or more anatomical structures of the eye and can include the lens 1 1 1 and one or more haptics 1 12.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device, a contact lens device, etc.
  • a contact lens can be configured without the haptics 1 12.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 includes the lens 1 1 1.
  • a controller 130 can include control electrical circuitry that can be operably coupled to the lens 1 1 1 and can switch or direct switching of the lens 1 1 1 between two or more optical settings, such as between two or more focal lengths.
  • the control electrical circuitry of the controller can generate a switching signal and, responsive at least partially to the switching signal, the lens 1 1 1 can switch from a first optical setting, such as a first focal length, to a second optical setting, such as a second optical length.
  • the controller 130 can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • a controller 130 can be mounted on or embedded in the haptics 1 12, in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 110, or in another suitable portion of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the field sensor 140 can be any suitable sensor, such as sensor(s) suitable for detecting changes in the identifiable magnetic or electric field, which can correspond to vergence rotation of the eyes, as described below in more detail.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include acceleration sensor 145, which can include any number of suitable sensors for detecting acceleration (or change in velocity or acceleration) of the subject' s first or second eye.
  • the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, or any additional sensors, such as physiological characteristics sensor can be embedded in or mounted on the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., MEMS-based sensors that can be embedded in or mounted on one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10).
  • suitable field sensors include Hall effect sensors, magnetoresi stance sensors (e.g., AMR magnetometer, GMR magnetometer), induction coils, magneto-diodes, Lorentz force based sensors, an electron tunneling based sensor, or a MEMS compass.
  • the field sensor 140 can generate one or more detection outputs (e.g., a measurable change in voltage or resonant frequency) that can be related to or based on the changes in the position of an identifiable magnetic field, which can be related to the change in vergence between the subject's eyes.
  • the field sensor 140 can generate a signal that can include detection output of the field sensor 140.
  • suitable acceleration sensors include MEMS-based accelerometers, MEMS-based gyroscopes (e.g., vibrating structure gyroscope), etc.
  • one or more signals received from the acceleration sensor 145 can be related to motion of the first or second eye of the subject and change in vergence therebetween.
  • the acceleration sensor 145 can be operably coupled or connected to the controller
  • the acceleration sensor 145 can be mechanically coupled to the switchable lens device 1 10 that can be operably connected or secured to the right or left eye of the subject. Hence, for example, the acceleration sensor 145 can generate one or more signals responsive to movement of the eye (e.g., responsive to the movement of the eye to which the switchable lens device 1 10 is connected), as the acceleration sensor 145 moves together with the eye.
  • the controller 130 can determine angular acceleration or velocity of the eye, at least partially responsive to the signal(s) received from the acceleration sensor 145 (e.g., at least partially based on the signals received from multiple accelerometers that can comprise the acceleration sensor 145, the controller 130 can determine the direction and magnitude of angular acceleration and velocity of the subject's eye).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can optionally include a field source 150 (e.g., a magnetic field source), which can establish an identifiable magnetic field that can be detectable by an additional sensor that can be operably coupled to an additional controller.
  • the field source 150 can be a dipole magnet (e.g., a permanent magnet, an electromagnet, combination of the foregoing, etc.) and can establish or generate a corresponding identifiable dipole magnetic field.
  • the field source 150 can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the field source 150 can be embedded in the haptics 112 (as shown in FIG. 4B) or in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the field source 150 can be generally fixed in or stationary relative to the eye. Additionally or alternatively, the field source 150 can have a predetermine orientation relative to the eye or to the optical axis thereof.
  • the field source can be embedded within the switchable lens device 1 10 at a first predetermined orientation relative to the switchable lens device 1 10, and the switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted within the eye at a second predetermined orientation relative to the eye.
  • the identifiable field such as an identifiable magnetic field can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye or relative to the optical axis thereof.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be positioned in the eye in a manner that movement of the eye results in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • movement of the eye can produce a corresponding movement of the field source 150 and of the magnetic field established thereby.
  • a sensor detects the change in the established identifiable magnetic field, which can correspond to the movement of the identifiable magnetic field and of the eye (e.g., the movement of the eye can be tilting or pivoting of the eye that at least partially corresponds to a vergence rotation between the eyes).
  • a switchable lens device in the first eye can communicate with another switchable lens in the second eye, and vice versa (e.g., the switchable lens devices can be operably coupled together).
  • the switchable lens device in the second eye can send to the switchable lens device 1 10 in the first eye the detection output received from a first sensor in the switchable lens in the second eye, can send focal length determination, etc.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a communication device 160 (e.g., the controller 130 can be operably coupled to the communication device 160).
  • the communication device 160 can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the communication device 160 can be embedded in the haptics 1 12 (as shown in FIG. 4B) or in the lens 11 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the communication device 160 can be wireless (e.g., the communication device 160 can be a transmitter or a transceiver) or wired.
  • a wireless (e.g., RF- based or US-based) connection can be established between the communication device 160 and another or additional communication device.
  • the communication device 160 and another communication device can have a wired connection therebetween.
  • an electrical conductor connecting the communication device 160 and another communication device can be implanted in or near the eyes of the subject.
  • the communication device 160 can be operably coupled to the additional communication device, such as to send data therebetween.
  • the power source may include a parasitic power device, such as an induction coil, one or more photocells, thermoelectric device, or any other device configured to harvest energy from a subject or the environment.
  • the induction coil can include a channel having a magnet therein, the channel passing the induction coil upon movement of the subject (e.g., eye-movement or blinking).
  • an induction coil can be disposed in the eye of a subject (e.g., in or adjacent to the switchable lens) and a corresponding magnet may be positioned on an adjacent part of the subject (e.g., an eyelid or bridge of the nose) whereby movement of the eye or eyelid can cause a current in the induction coil.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 is described as including the controller 130, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, and communication device 160, configurations of the switchable lens device 1 10 can vary from one embodiment to the next.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include only the controller 130 and the acceleration sensor 145 that can detect a change in the position, velocity, or acceleration of the subject's first or second eye).
  • one of the switchable lens device e.g., of a switchable lens system
  • the switchable lens device can include only the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, and the controller 130, which the other switchable lens device can include the field sensor 140 that can be operably coupled to the controller 130.
  • the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device or multiple switchable lens devices (e.g., a switchable lens device can be located in one or in both eyes of the subject).
  • the switchable lens devices of the switchable lens system can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • any of the switchable lens devices included in the switchable lens systems described herein can include or can be operably coupled to any number of controllers, sensors, field sources, communication devices, or combinations thereof, which can be similar to or the same as the controller 130, field sensor 140, acceleration sensor 145, field source 150, and communication device 160.
  • the field source 150 or the field sensor 140 are optional for the switchable lens device 1 10 or for operation thereof or of the controller 130.
  • the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device 1 10 or can include multiple switchable lens devices that can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., the switchable lens system 100 (FIGS. 1-2)).
  • FIGS. 5A-5B schematically illustrate a switchable lens system 100a that includes a first switchable lens device 1 10a in the first or right eye (not shown), and a second switchable lens device 1 10b in the second or left eye (not shown), according to an embodiment.
  • first eye/right eye and second eye/left eye are used for ease of description only and should not be read as limiting (e.g., the first switchable lens device 1 10a can be positioned in the second or left eye and the second switchable lens device 1 10b can be positioned in the first or right eye). Except as otherwise described herein, any of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, second switchable lens device 1 10b, and their elements and components can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens devices 1 10, 1 10' (FIGS. 1-4B) and their corresponding elements and components.
  • FIG. 5A illustrates the first switchable lens device 1 10a and the second switchable lens device 1 10b, with respective first and second optical axes 60a and 60b of the first and second eyes oriented to define a first angle ⁇ 1 therebetween, at which the eyes are focused on first object at first distance from the subject.
  • FIG. 5B shows the first and second eye focused on a second obj ect that is closer than the first object, and the first and second optical axes 60a, 60b define a second angle ⁇ 2 that is smaller than the first angle ⁇ .
  • the first switchable lens device 1 10a includes a first field sensor 140a and a first acceleration sensor 145a operably coupled to a controller 130a including control electrical circuitry (e.g., the first field sensor 140a, first acceleration sensor 145a, or controller 130a can be embedded in one or more portions of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, such as in the haptics 1 12a of the first switchable lens device 1 10a).
  • the controller 130a can be operably coupled to first lens 1 1 la of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, such as to switch or direct switching of the focal length of the first lens 1 1 la at least between two different focal lengths.
  • the first switchable lens device 1 10a can include a first acceleration sensor 145a
  • the second switchable lens device 1 10b can include a second acceleration sensor 145b
  • the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b can be operably associated with the respective first and second eyes of the subject, such that movement of the first eye correspondingly moves the first switchable lens device 1 10a, and movement of the second eye moves the second switchable lens device 1 10b.
  • the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b of the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b can detect the movement of the eyes.
  • the one or more signals received by the controller 130 from one or more acceleration sensors can be related to or indicative of acceleration of the first eye and of the second eye.
  • the controller 130a can determine the velocity of the first eye by integrating the function of the acceleration (e.g., over time, to determine velocity at a specific time), which can be generated responsive to the one or more signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b.
  • the controller 130 can determine the position or change in position of the first eye and second eye (e.g., by integrating over time the function of velocity).
  • the controller 130a can determine a change in vergence between the eyes based on the determined acceleration, velocity, or position (or change in position) of each of the eyes. Additionally, the controller 130a can distinguish the change in vergence between the first eye and second eye and tilt of the first eye or the second eye. For example, when tilted, the optical axes 60a, 60b of the first and second eyes can be oriented substantially parallel to each other, while when focused on an object in front of the subject, the optical axes 60a, 60b can be oriented at non parallel angles (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 5A-5B), where the first and second angles ⁇ , ⁇ 2 are non- zero angles.
  • the controller 130a can determine the first and second angles ⁇ , ⁇ 2 based on the change in one or more of the acceleration, velocity, or angular position or orientation of the first and second eyes. Moreover, the controller 130a can determine the first and second angles ⁇ , ⁇ 2 based on the change the field or one or more of the components thereof, as detected by the field sensor 140a or 140b. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can determine one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye based on the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor 145a and one or more second signals received from the second acceleration sensor 145b.
  • the controller 130a can include or can be operably connected to a data table that can correlate one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye with the vergence between the eyes.
  • the subject can train the controller 130a or generate the table responsive to prompts from the controller 130a.
  • the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, determine one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye, and prompt user for input identifying the vergence or tilt of the eyes; the input can be stored in the table and correlated with the signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b.
  • the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, determine one or more of a change difference in angular position, a change difference in angular velocity, or a change difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye, and prompt user for input identifying the vergence or tilt of the eyes; the input can be stored in the table and correlated with the change in signals received from the first and second accelerometers 145a, 145b or with the changes in the acceleration, velocity, or position.
  • the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b and can generate one or more switching signals for switching the lenses 1 1 la or 1 1 lb from a first optical setting to a second optical setting.
  • the lens 1 1 1a or lens 1 1 1b can have a first focal length at the first optical setting and a second focal length at the second optical setting.
  • multiple switchable lenses can be switched or controlled by a single controller, such as the controller 130a.
  • each of the multiple lenses can include a controller and the respective controllers can be operably coupled to each other (e.g., via hardwired connection, wireless connection, etc.), such that a first controller receives one or more signals from a second controller and vice versa.
  • first controller can receive signals from second controller; the signals can be related to the acceleration or velocity of the second eye (e.g., based on the one or more signals received at the second controller from the acceleration sensor).
  • multiple controllers, each of which can include a respective electrical circuitry can operate collectively as a single controller that can generate one or more switching signals for a first lens in the first eye of the subject or for the second lens in the second eye of the subject.
  • controller 130a or one or more portions thereof can be located at any number of suitable locations (e.g., relative to the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b.
  • the controller 130a can be located remotely from the at least one or from both of the first and second switchable lenses 1 1 1a, 1 1 1b.
  • a portion of the controller 130a can be located or included in a personal electronic device (e.g., a smart phone or the like).
  • the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b can be operably coupled to the controller 130a with any number of suitable connections.
  • the acceleration sensor 145a or 145b can be operably coupled to the controller 130a via at least one of a radio frequency connection, an optical transmission connection, an ultrasonic connection, or an electrical-conductor connection.
  • the first or second acceleration sensor 145a, 145b can be coupled to the controller 130a by a hardwired connection.
  • the controller 130 can generate one or more switching signals to switch or direct switching of the lens 1 1 1 from a first optical setting to a second optical setting, or vice versa.
  • the controller 130 can generate the one or more switching signals responsive to the one or more signals received from first acceleration sensor 145a that detected motion of the first eye or from the one or more signals received from second acceleration sensor 145b that detected motion of the second eye.
  • the controller 130 can generate the one or more switching signals responsive to the detected change in vergence between the first eye and second eye, and detection of the change in vergence between the eyes can be based on determined acceleration or velocity of the eyes (e.g., angular acceleration or velocity determined by the controller 130 based on one or more signals received from the acceleration sensor(s)).
  • at least one acceleration sensor can be located outside of the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b.
  • at least one acceleration sensor can be positioned remotely from the subject's first and second eyes.
  • At least one acceleration sensor that is positioned externally to the first and second eyes of the subject can be operably coupled to the controller 130a; hence, in an embodiment, one or more signals received by the controller 130a from such sensor(s) can be associated with the general movement of the subject and not with the movement of the subject' s first or second eye (e.g., can be associated with movement of the subject's body or head).
  • the controller 130a can compare the signals or acceleration determined from the remote acceleration sensor(s), which are positioned remotely of the subject's eyes, to the signals or acceleration determined from the first or second accelerations sensor 145a, 145b.
  • the controller 130a can filter out at least some of the noise that may be present in the signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b (e.g., the controller 130a can subtract the acceleration determined from the remote acceleration sensors from the acceleration determined from one or more of the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b).
  • the controller 130a can filter out one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, such as signals that may correspond to general vibration of one or more portions of the sensors (e.g., noise from vibration of the mass of a MEMS sensor that may occur without movement of the subject or subject' s eyes) and can filter out signals resulting from movement of the subject (e.g., walking, driving, etc.).
  • signals that may correspond to general vibration of one or more portions of the sensors (e.g., noise from vibration of the mass of a MEMS sensor that may occur without movement of the subject or subject' s eyes) and can filter out signals resulting from movement of the subject (e.g., walking, driving, etc.).
  • the controller 130a can include or can be operably connected to a storage that includes or stores signal samples corresponding to signal noise.
  • the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b while the subject is not moving the eye and standing still, while the subject is walking, while the subject is driving, etc. (e.g., to identify noise signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b under different conditions when the subject is not moving the eyes).
  • the controller 130a can filter out or ignore one or more signals or portions of the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, which correspond or similar to the noise signals previously received by the controller 130a (e.g., during calibration of the controller 130a).
  • the noise characteristics of the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b can change over time.
  • the controller 130a can be configured to retest or rest the stored noise signals.
  • the subject can periodically perform various activities without moving eyes and provide feedback or input to the controller 130a that can correlate various conditions of the subject, such as walking, sitting, driving, etc., with noise signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b.
  • the controller 130a can reject or filter out signals related to or indicative of up and down movements of the eyes.
  • the controller 130a can determine orientation of the subject's head relative to gravitational vector. Moreover, as described herein, based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, the controller 130a can determine direction of movement of the subject's eyes relative to the head of the subject. For example, the controller 130a can determine movement of the subject's eyes relative to the gravitational vector and correlate the determined movement to the orientation of the subject's head relative to the gravitational vector to determine the movement of the eyes relative to the head.
  • the controller 130a can be configured to differentiate at least one noise signal and at least one detection signal by comparing magnitude of a signal to the magnitude of a second signal and by identifying the first signal as the at least one noise signal. For example, both the first and second signals can be received from the same acceleration sensor (e.g., from the first acceleration sensor 145a or from the second sensor 145b).
  • the controller 130a can filter out signals below a certain magnitude threshold. For example, the controller 130a can determine an average signal level while the subject is not moving the eyes and filter out or subtract signals below the threshold of the average signal level.
  • At least one of the switchable lens devices can include an energy field sensor (e.g., a sensor configured to detect a change in a magnetic or electric field).
  • at least one of the switchable lens devices can include a field source that can generate an identifiable energy field (e.g., a magnetic field) that can be detected by the energy field sensor.
  • the second switchable lens device 110b can include a magnetic field source 150b mounted thereon or embedded therein.
  • the magnetic field source 150b can establish an identifiable magnetic field 50b that can be sensed by the first field sensor 140a. More specifically, for example, the first field sensor 140a can detect the change in orientation or location of the identifiable magnetic field 50b. It should be also appreciated that the magnetic field source 50b can be positioned or secured in the subject's second eye without the second switchable lens device 1 10b (e.g., the magnetic field source 50b can be implanted in the eye, such as in the sclera of the eye). In any event, in one or more embodiments, the magnetic field source 150b can move and tilt together with the second eye (correspondingly moving the identifiable magnetic field 50b), and the first field sensor 140a can detect the change in the orientation or location of the identifiable magnetic field 50b.
  • any of the elements or components described herein as included in one or more switchable lens devices can be directly implanted in the eye or secured to the eye, without implanting or otherwise associating a switchable lens device in that eye (e.g., a controller, an acceleration sensor, a field source, a field sensor, etc., can be implanted directly in the eye).
  • a switchable lens device e.g., a controller, an acceleration sensor, a field source, a field sensor, etc.
  • the controller 130a can be configured to correlate the detected change in the identifiable magnetic field 50b with the vergence rotation between the eyes.
  • the first field sensor 140a can generate a detection output that can correspond to a change at least partially corresponding to the vergence rotation by detecting a changed component of the identifiable magnetic field, which can be in a direction substantially perpendicular to a direction of a dominant component of the identifiable magnetic field.
  • the detection output can be received by the controller 130a, and based on the detection output, the controller 130a can determine the vergence rotation between the eyes.
  • the controller 130a can determine an apparent or estimated object distance (e.g., the distance from the subject to the object on which the subject' s eyes are attempting to focus). In an embodiment, at least partially based on the determined distance, the controller 130a can determine the first or second focal length for the switchable lens (e.g., for the switchable lens 1 1 1a or for the switchable lens 1 1 1b) and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens to the determined focal length.
  • an apparent or estimated object distance e.g., the distance from the subject to the object on which the subject' s eyes are attempting to focus.
  • the controller 130a can determine the first or second focal length for the switchable lens (e.g., for the switchable lens 1 1 1a or for the switchable lens 1 1 1b) and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens to the determined focal length.
  • the electromagnet can be operably coupled to the controller 130a or to an additional controller (e.g., to a controller in the second switchable lens device 1 10b), which can turn on or off the electromagnet or can change an intensity of the magnetic field established or generated thereby.
  • the electromagnet can be pulsed in a manner that can distinguish or identify the magnetic field established thereby from other, interfering magnetic fields that can be present in the subject' s environment.
  • the controller 130a can distinguish the identifiable pulsed magnetic field from other magnetic fields.
  • the first field sensor 140a can be any suitable sensor or multiple sensors, which can be sufficiently miniaturized for placement in the subject's eye (e.g., MEMS based sensors that can be embedded in or mounted on the first switchable lens device 110a).
  • suitable sensors include Hall effect sensors, magnetore si stance sensors (e.g., AMR magnetometer, GMR magnetometer), induction coils, magneto-diodes, Lorentz force based sensors, Electron Tunneling based sensor, MEMS compass, etc.
  • the first field sensor 140a can be or can include any suitable sensor or combination of sensors that can detect the change in the location or orientation of the identifiable magnetic field 50b.
  • the first switchable lens device 1 10a can be positioned at a predetermined location or orientation relative to the first optical axis 60a of the first eye, and the second switchable lens device 1 10b or the identifiable magnetic field 50b or pole axis of the magnetic field source 150b can be oriented relative to the second optical axis 60b of the second eye at a predetermined pitch angle a.
  • the predetermined pitch angle can be any suitable angle, which can vary from one embodiment to the next.
  • the pitch angle a can be a non-parallel angle relative to the first or second optical axis 60a, 60b, an obtuse angle, or an acute angle.
  • the pitch angle can be 0°, such that a magnetic field component of the identifiable magnetic field 50b is substantially parallel to the second optical axis 60b.
  • the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented such that the first field sensor 140a or the controller 130a can distinguish between in-tilt or convergence of the eyes (e.g., when the subject attempts to change focus on from a first object to a second object that is closer to the subject) from co-tilt of the eyes (e.g., when the subject tilts or pivots eyes to focus on an object located peripherally, such as to the left or to the right of the subject).
  • the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented at about 45° relative to the second optical axis 60b (e.g., within less than 1° of the 45°, within less than 2° of the 45°, within less than 5° of the 45°).
  • the identifiable magnetic field 50b can have any suitable orientation relative to the second optical axis 60b.
  • the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented relative to the second optical axis 60b such that convergence of the eyes results in an increased magnitude or changed direction of the magnetic field vector (e.g., Lorentz force vector), which can be distinguishable from the direction of the magnetic field vector sensed by the first field sensor 140a when the eyes co-tilt, as discussed below in more detail.
  • the magnetic field vector e.g., Lorentz force vector
  • the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented such that the detection output received from the first field sensor 140a can be processed by the controller 130a to distinguish or identify the change in magnitude or direction of the Lorentz force vector of the identifiable magnetic field 50b in a manner that the controller 130a can distinguish convergence or in-tilt of the eyes from co-tilt.
  • the first field sensor 140a is mounted or embedded within the first switchable lens device 110a so that as the first eye tilts, changing the direction of first optical axis 60a and first switchable lens device 110a, the sensitivity direction of the first field sensor 140a also changes. Accordingly, the value of a specific directional component of magnetic field measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of the first eye. It should be further appreciated, that the value of a specific directional component of magnetic field measured by the first field sensor 140a will also be changed by changes in the direction the magnetic field source 50b, and the accompanying changes in the field at the location of the first field sensor 140a.
  • field values measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of the second eye. Accordingly, field values measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of both the first eye and the second eye.
  • the second switchable lens device 110b can include multiple magnets that can establish multiple identifiable magnetic fields. Moreover, a single identifiable magnetic field oriented at an acute or obtuse angle relative to the second optic axis 60b can be represented by superpositioning two or more identifiable magnetic fields established by multiple magnets.
  • a single tilted identifiable magnetic field source (e.g., magnetic field source oriented at 45° relative to the second optic axis 60b) can be represented as two magnetic field sources: e.g., an in- plane field source m ⁇ oriented parallel to the plane of the IOL (i.e., orthogonal to the optical axis 60b), and an out-of-plane field source m L oriented perpendicular to the plane of the IOL (i.e., along the optical axis 60b).
  • the first field sensor 140a can be configured to measure magnetic field at a specified angle relative to the optical axis 60a.
  • the controller 130a can determine change in vergence between the first and second eyes of the subject responsive to the signals received from the field sensor 140a and from the acceleration sensors 145a or 145b. For example, the controller 130a can make a first determination of whether movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence or a tilt of the eyes based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, as described above. The controller 130a can make a second determination of whether movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence or tilt of the eye based on the signals received from the field sensor 140a.
  • the controller 130a can make a third determination of the position or change in vergence by comparing the first determination to the second determination (e.g., when the first and second determinations indicate a change in vergence, the controller 130a can make the third determination that the movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence). Moreover, the controller 130a determined the value of the change in vergence by comparing the first and second determined changes in the vergence (e.g., by taking an average of the first and second determined changes in the vergence). In an embodiment, the controller 130a can generate a switching signal based on the third determination (e.g., the controller 130a can switch or direct switching of the first or second lens 1 1 1a, 1 1 1b responsive to the third determination).
  • the controller 130a can determine that the first determination of change in vergence (e.g., determination based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b) is different than the second determination of change in version (e.g., determination based on the signals received from the field sensor).
  • the first determination can indicate that the subject's eyes are tilting, while the second determination can indicate that the subject' s eye are converging or diverging, or vice versa.
  • the controller 130a can be configured to generate a third determination that corresponds to maintaining the optical settings (e.g., the focal length) of the first or second lens 1 1 1a, 1 1 lb.
  • the acceleration sensor(s) can be associated with the first or second eye of the subject by any number of suitable mechanisms.
  • the acceleration sensor can be mechanically connected to the switchable lens device.
  • the acceleration sensor can be implanted in the first or second eye of the subject.
  • remote acceleration sensor (that can be placed externally to the first and second eye) can be included in a personal electronic device that can be on the subject, implanted under the skin of the subject, or included in any number of suitable devices sized and configured to be carried by the subject.
  • the remote acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the controller 130a and can send one or more signals to the controller 130a.
  • the switchable lens device can include any number of suitable switchable lenses that can be associated with the first or second eye of the subject to provide corrective focusing for the corresponding eye of the subject.
  • FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a switchable lens systems 100c, lOOd worn by subject 70.
  • the switchable lens system 100c includes switchable lens devices 1 10c, HOd.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10c can include a first switchable contact lens that can be positioned in the first eye 20 of the subject 70, and the switchable lens device HOd can include a second switchable contact lens HOd that can be positioned in second eye 30 of the subject 70.
  • the switchable lens system 100c can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein.
  • the switchable lens system 100c can include one or more acceleration sensors that can be associated with the first eye 20 or second eye 30 and detect respective movements thereof, as described above.
  • the switchable lens system 100c can include an acceleration sensor 146c, that can be positioned remotely from the first eye 20 or second eye 30.
  • the acceleration sensor 146c can be positioned on or mechanically connected to the head of the subject 70 (e.g., such as to detect movement of the subject 70 or movement of the subject' s head).
  • the acceleration sensor 146c can be operably coupled to the controller.
  • the controller can receive one or more signals from the acceleration sensor 146c.
  • the signals received from the acceleration sensor 146c can be processed or used by the controller to filter out noise from the acceleration sensors associated with the first eye 20 or with the second eye 30 and sensing the respective motion or acceleration thereof.
  • the acceleration sensor 146c is shown as positioned between the first and second eyes 20, 30 of the subject 70.
  • the acceleration sensor 146c can be implanted under the skin of the subject 70 (e.g., near the nose of the subject 70). It should be appreciated, however, that the acceleration sensor 146c can be located at any suitable location (e.g., as described above).
  • the controller or one or more portions thereof can be located at any number of suitable locations.
  • one or more portions of the controller can be included in a personal electronic device (e.g., the portable electronic device can include an acceleration sensor or can receive one or more signals from one or more acceleration sensors, such as from the acceleration sensor 146a).
  • the acceleration sensor 146c can be operably connected to the controller with any number of suitable connections (e.g., hardwired or wireless).
  • the controller 130e can include a database 250 (e.g., the database 340 and can have data stored in a storage memory of the controller 130e).
  • the controller 130e can store one or more parameters in the database 340 (e.g., the controller 130e can store training or tuning data in the database 340).
  • a user e.g., a subject using and/or wearing the switchable lens device HOe
  • the controller 130e can be operably coupled to and/or incorporated with any number of suitable devices, such as personal electronic devices (e.g., personal computers, smart phones, tablets, etc.) and/or any other computing and/or input devices.
  • personal electronic devices e.g., personal computers, smart phones, tablets, etc.
  • any other computing and/or input devices e.g., multi-focus lens systems, IOL systems, etc.
  • any of the systems described herein e.g., multi-focus lens systems, IOL systems, etc.
  • the switchable lens device can include one or more sensors configured to detect movement of at least one eye of the subject (e.g., to determine a least one of position, velocity, or acceleration of at least on eye of the subject).
  • the switchable lens device can include one or more acceleration sensors that can be operably coupled to or associated with a first eye or a second eye of the subject.
  • a first acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the first eye
  • a second acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the second eye of the subject.
  • the first and second acceleration sensors can move together with the corresponding first and second eyes of the subject, and can generate one or more signals that can correspond to the movement of the first and second eyes.
  • the first and second acceleration sensors can include any suitable sensor capable of sensing or detecting acceleration.
  • acceleration sensors can include one or more of a MEMS accelerometer, a gyroscope, combinations or arrays thereof, etc.
  • the first acceleration sensor or the second acceleration sensor can be associated with or mechanically coupled to the switchable lens device.
  • the first acceleration sensor can be mechanically coupled to a first switchable lens of the switchable lens device
  • the second acceleration sensor can be mechanically coupled to a second switchable lens of the switchable lens device.
  • the switchable lens system can include at least one switchable lens device (e.g., an IOL device, a contact lens, etc.) that can be positioned in an eye of a subject.
  • the acceleration sensor can be operably connected to the eye of the subject, such as to detect motion of the eye responsive to a vergence of the subject's eyes.
  • the acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to a controller that can direct the switchable lens to change an optical setting (e.g., a focal length) responsive to the output of the acceleration sensor, which is related to the vergence rotation.
  • the switchable device system can include a controller.
  • the controller can be operably coupled to the field sensor and can receive detection output from the sensor. More specifically, the detection outputs from the sensor can be based on the detected change in the field or based on the one or more components thereof, which can be related to vergence rotation between the eyes of the subject.
  • the control can distinguish between vergence rotation of the eyes and co-tilt rotation of the eyes (e.g., when the eyes of the subject tilt in the same direction, such as to view an object located peripherally or to a side of the subject).
  • the controller can compare the determination of change in vergence between the first eye and the second eye (e.g., whether the tilt of the first and second eye corresponds to a change in vergence), which is determined responsive to the one or more signals received from the accelerometer(s), to the determination of change in vergence, which is determined responsive to the one or more signals received from the sensors. For example, when the signals received from the accelerometer(s) and from the sensors indicate that the tilt of the subject' s eyes corresponds to a change in vergence, the controller can determine that the eyes converged or diverged (e.g., based on the direction of movement of the eyes) or can generate a switching signal for switching the switchable lens from one focal length to another).
  • the controller can determine that the eyes converged or diverged (e.g., based on the direction of movement of the eyes) or can generate a switching signal for switching the switchable lens from one focal length to another).
  • the switchable lens systems disclosed herein can include one or more sensors configured to detect one or more physiological indicia of the subject.
  • the switchable lens system can include one or more sensors configured to detect glucose concentration (e.g., in the eye of the subject), eye pressure, heart rate, biological proteins present in the eye, or any other biological indicia.
  • the one or more sensors can be operably coupled to the controller.
  • the controller of the switchable lens system can be configured to transmit the measurements of the physical indicia to a remote source such as a computer, a cellular phone, or other electronic device.
  • the measured physical indicia may be used to determine the health of a subject or eye thereof, customize the operation of the switchable lens device to the particular subject, determine if the controller needs to be removed or adjusted, or determine if the focal adjustments of the controller are suitable for the subject.
  • the electronic device may then transmit instructions to the controller to selectively control or otherwise adjust the functioning of the switchable lens system, such as controllably changing the focal length of the switchable lens device.
  • FIG. 1 schematically illustrates eyes 20 and 30 of a subject focused on a first object 10 that is positioned at a first distance from the subject.
  • the switchable lens system 100 can include a first switchable lens device 1 10 positioned in a first eye 20 and a second switchable lens device 110' positioned in a second eye 30 of the subject.
  • the switchable lenses 1 10, 1 10' can be intraocular switchable lenses.
  • the switchable lenses 1 10, 1 10' can be lenses that can be positionable externally to the subject's first and second eyes 20, 30 (e.g., contact lenses).
  • the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10' can be configured to augment or correct visual deficiencies of the subject or to replace the lenses in the respective first eye 20 or second eye 30 of the subject (e.g., in cataract surgeries).
  • the switchable lens system 100 can include only a single switchable lens (e.g., the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10'), which can be positioned in the first eye 20 or in the second eye 30.
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to or set at a first focal length, such that the light entering the eye from the distance of the first object 10 is focused on the retina of the respective eyes 20, 30, thereby focusing the eyes 20, 30 on the first object 10.
  • FIG. 2 schematically shows the subject's eyes 20, 30 focused on a second object 40, which is positioned at a second distance and closer to the subject than the first object 10 (FIG. 1).
  • the angle between the optical axis thereof can change to a second angle ⁇ 2 .
  • the eyes 20, 30 focus on the closer, second object 40, the eyes 20, 30 converge or in-tilt, such that the second angle ⁇ 2 defined by the respective optical axis thereof is greater than the first angle ⁇ .
  • the switchable lens devices 110 or 1 10' can be switched to the second focal length, which can be shorter than the first focal length.
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can include one or more sensors that can sense or detect a change in an identifiable field (e.g., magnetic field) and can correlate that change to the change vergence rotation between the eyes 20, 30 (e.g., convergence to focus on a closer object or divergence to focus on a farther object).
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to the first focal length (longer than the second focal length).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 or 1 10' can distinguish between vergence rotation from co-tilt rotation (e.g., when the eyes 20, 30 rotate in the same direction, such as to observe an object located peripherally from the user).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 or 1 10' can switch focal length responsive to detected vergence rotation.
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can maintain a previously set focal length during co-tilt of the eyes 20, 30.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic side, cross- sectional view of the eye 20 with the switchable lens device 1 10 implanted therein (e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device), according to an embodiment.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device
  • the switchable lens device 1 10' or its location in the eye 30 can have the same or similar configuration.
  • the eye 20 includes a cornea 21, an iris 22, a natural lens, and a retina 23 therebehind.
  • One or more switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted in the eye 20.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted over the natural lens, in front of (e.g., in the anterior chamber) or behind the iris 22 (e.g., in the posterior chamber), or internal to the natural lens such as in a capsular bag 24 of the natural lens.
  • the natural lens can be absent from the eye 20 (e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 can replace the natural lens and can be placed in the anterior chamber, the posterior chamber, or internal to the capsular bag that is used to contain the natural lens).
  • the switchable lens 1 10 can be any suitable lens that is configured to switch between at least two different optical settings (e.g., between two different focal lengths) responsive to one or more electrical inputs.
  • a controller can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 10 among two or more optical settings.
  • the switchable lens 1 10 can be an electrically-modifiable diffractive lens, as described in more detail in U. S. Application No. 14/807,673, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
  • the switchable lens 1 10 can be liquid crystal lens (e.g., a liquid crystal lens with an electrically tunable focal length).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a lens 1 1 1 and haptics 1 12 connected to or integrated with the lens 1 1 1.
  • the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on or secured to one or more structures in the eye 20, thereby positioning or securing the switchable lens device 1 10 in the eye 20.
  • the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on the ciliary body or muscles or in or on the capsular bag 24 of the natural lens.
  • the lens 1 1 1 can be located laterally in the center of the eye 20 with the haptics 1 12 extending laterally therefrom.
  • the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10 can be switched between two or more focal lengths, to focus light entering the eye from a selected distance on the retina 23 of the eye 20, thereby providing a focus on an object located at the selected focal length and augmenting or correcting the vision of the subject.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include lenses that can be at least partially positionable externally to the subject' s eyes, such as contact lenses.
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be included in or can comprise a contact lens, the can be positionable near the subject' s eye.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be substantially fixed within the eye 20 (e.g., the IOL device can be substantially immobile relative to the optical axis of the eye 20).
  • movement of the eye 20 can result in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can correspondingly tilt or pivot together with the eye 20.
  • one, some, or all of the elements or components of the switchable lens device 1 10 can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye 20 or relative to the optical axis thereof, as described below in more detail.
  • FIGS 4A and 4B illustrate switchable lens device 1 10, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 4A is a top view of the switchable lens device 1 10, and
  • FIG. 4B is a side view of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be configured to fit in or on one or more anatomical structures of the eye and can include the lens 1 1 1 and one or more haptics 1 12.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device, a contact lens device, etc.
  • a contact lens can be configured without the haptics 1 12.
  • a controller 130 can include control electrical circuitry that can be operably coupled to the lens 1 1 1 and can switch or direct switching of the lens 1 1 1 between two or more optical settings, such as between two or more focal lengths.
  • the control electrical circuitry of the controller can generate a switching signal and, responsive at least partially to the switching signal, the lens 1 1 1 can switch from a first optical setting, such as a first focal length, to a second optical setting, such as a second optical length.
  • the controller 130 can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • a controller 130 can be mounted on or embedded in the haptics 1 12, in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 110, or in another suitable portion of the switchable lens device 1 10. Moreover, the controller 130 can receive a detection output from one or more sensors, such as from an acceleration sensor, field sensor, physiological characteristic sensor, etc. The detection output(s) from the sensor(s) can be related or correspond to the vergence rotation between the subject's eyes. At least partially based on the received detection output, the controller 130 can switch the lens 1 1 1 to a suitable or predetermined focal length.
  • the controller 130 can be operably coupled to and can receive a detection outputs from a field sensor 140 or from an acceleration sensor 145.
  • the field sensor 140 can include a single or multiple sensors that can detect presence or changes in a magnetic field.
  • the acceleration sensor 145 can also include a single accelerometer, gyroscope, etc., or multiple accelerometers, gyroscopes, etc., (e.g., two or more of which can be arranged in an array).
  • the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the physiological characteristic sensor, etc. can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the field sensor 140 or the acceleration sensor 145 can be mounted on or embedded in the haptics 1 12 or in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the field sensor 140 can be any suitable sensor, such as sensor(s) suitable for detecting changes in the identifiable magnetic or electric field, which can correspond to vergence rotation of the eyes, as described below in more detail.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include acceleration sensor 145, which can include any number of suitable sensors for detecting acceleration (or change in velocity or acceleration) of the subject' s first or second eye.
  • the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, or any additional sensors, such as physiological characteristics sensor can be embedded in or mounted on the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., MEMS-based sensors that can be embedded in or mounted on one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10).
  • suitable field sensors include Hall effect sensors, magnetoresi stance sensors (e.g., AMR magnetometer, GMR magnetometer), induction coils, magneto-diodes, Lorentz force based sensors, an electron tunneling based sensor, or a MEMS compass.
  • the field sensor 140 can generate one or more detection outputs (e.g., a measurable change in voltage or resonant frequency) that can be related to or based on the changes in the position of an identifiable magnetic field, which can be related to the change in vergence between the subject's eyes.
  • the field sensor 140 can generate a signal that can include detection output of the field sensor 140.
  • suitable acceleration sensors include MEMS-based accelerometers, MEMS-based gyroscopes (e.g., vibrating structure gyroscope), etc.
  • one or more signals received from the acceleration sensor 145 can be related to motion of the first or second eye of the subject and change in vergence therebetween.
  • the acceleration sensor 145 can be operably coupled or connected to the controller 130. As described above, the acceleration sensor 145 can be mechanically coupled to the switchable lens device 1 10 that can be operably connected or secured to the right or left eye of the subject. Hence, for example, the acceleration sensor 145 can generate one or more signals responsive to movement of the eye (e.g., responsive to the movement of the eye to which the switchable lens device 1 10 is connected), as the acceleration sensor 145 moves together with the eye.
  • the acceleration sensor 145 can generate one or more signals responsive to the motion of the eye, and the controller 130 can receive the signal(s) from the acceleration sensor 145.
  • the controller 130 can determine acceleration of the eye (e.g., the rate of change of the eye' s velocity and direction thereof), velocity of the eye (e.g., the rate of movement of the eye and movement direction).
  • the controller 130 can determine angular acceleration or velocity of the eye, at least partially responsive to the signal(s) received from the acceleration sensor 145 (e.g., at least partially based on the signals received from multiple accelerometers that can comprise the acceleration sensor 145, the controller 130 can determine the direction and magnitude of angular acceleration and velocity of the subject's eye).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can optionally include a field source 150 (e.g., a magnetic field source), which can establish an identifiable magnetic field that can be detectable by an additional sensor that can be operably coupled to an additional controller.
  • the field source 150 can be a dipole magnet (e.g., a permanent magnet, an electromagnet, combination of the foregoing, etc.) and can establish or generate a corresponding identifiable dipole magnetic field.
  • the field source 150 can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the field source 150 can be embedded in the haptics 112 (as shown in FIG. 4B) or in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the field source 150 can be generally fixed in or stationary relative to the eye. Additionally or alternatively, the field source 150 can have a predetermine orientation relative to the eye or to the optical axis thereof.
  • the field source can be embedded within the switchable lens device 1 10 at a first predetermined orientation relative to the switchable lens device 1 10, and the switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted within the eye at a second predetermined orientation relative to the eye.
  • the identifiable field such as an identifiable magnetic field can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye or relative to the optical axis thereof.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be positioned in the eye in a manner that movement of the eye results in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • movement of the eye can produce a corresponding movement of the field source 150 and of the magnetic field established thereby.
  • a sensor detects the change in the established identifiable magnetic field, which can correspond to the movement of the identifiable magnetic field and of the eye (e.g., the movement of the eye can be tilting or pivoting of the eye that at least partially corresponds to a vergence rotation between the eyes).
  • the switchable lens device(s) can be located in one or in both eyes of the subject.
  • a switchable lens device in the first eye can communicate with another switchable lens in the second eye, and vice versa (e.g., the switchable lens devices can be operably coupled together).
  • the switchable lens device in the second eye can send to the switchable lens device 1 10 in the first eye the detection output received from a first sensor in the switchable lens in the second eye, can send focal length determination, etc.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a communication device 160 (e.g., the controller 130 can be operably coupled to the communication device 160).
  • the communication device 160 can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the communication device 160 can be embedded in the haptics 1 12 (as shown in FIG. 4B) or in the lens 11 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the communication device 160 can be wireless (e.g., the communication device 160 can be a transmitter or a transceiver) or wired.
  • a wireless (e.g., RF- based or US-based) connection can be established between the communication device 160 and another or additional communication device.
  • the communication device 160 and another communication device can have a wired connection therebetween.
  • an electrical conductor connecting the communication device 160 and another communication device can be implanted in or near the eyes of the subject.
  • the communication device 160 can be operably coupled to the additional communication device, such as to send data therebetween.
  • the controller 130, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, or communication device 160 can be operably coupled or connected to a power source.
  • the power source can include a rechargeable energy storage device or battery (not shown) that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the battery can be wirelessly recharged (e.g., a wireless or inductive charger can recharge the battery).
  • the battery can be operably connected to a photovoltaic cell that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the battery can be operably connected or coupled to a charge port that can be configured to accept a charging device.
  • the power source can power one or more of the controller 130, field sensor 140, field source 150, or communication device 160.
  • the power source may include a parasitic power device, such as an induction coil, one or more photocells, thermoelectric device, or any other device configured to harvest energy from a subject or the environment.
  • the induction coil can include a channel having a magnet therein, the channel passing the induction coil upon movement of the subject (e.g., eye-movement or blinking).
  • an induction coil can be disposed in the eye of a subject (e.g., in or adjacent to the switchable lens) and a corresponding magnet may be positioned on an adjacent part of the subject (e.g., an eyelid or bridge of the nose) whereby movement of the eye or eyelid can cause a current in the induction coil.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 is described as including the controller 130, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, and communication device 160, configurations of the switchable lens device 1 10 can vary from one embodiment to the next.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include only the controller 130 and the acceleration sensor 145 that can detect a change in the position, velocity, or acceleration of the subject's first or second eye).
  • one of the switchable lens device e.g., of a switchable lens system
  • the switchable lens device can include only the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, and the controller 130, which the other switchable lens device can include the field sensor 140 that can be operably coupled to the controller 130.
  • the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device or multiple switchable lens devices (e.g., a switchable lens device can be located in one or in both eyes of the subject).
  • the switchable lens devices of the switchable lens system can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • any of the switchable lens devices included in the switchable lens systems described herein can include or can be operably coupled to any number of controllers, sensors, field sources, communication devices, or combinations thereof, which can be similar to or the same as the controller 130, field sensor 140, acceleration sensor 145, field source 150, and communication device 160.
  • the field source 150 or the field sensor 140 are optional for the switchable lens device 1 10 or for operation thereof or of the controller 130.
  • the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device 1 10 or can include multiple switchable lens devices that can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., the switchable lens system 100 (FIGS. 1-2)).
  • FIGS. 5A-5B schematically illustrate a switchable lens system 100a that includes a first switchable lens device 1 10a in the first or right eye (not shown), and a second switchable lens device 1 10b in the second or left eye (not shown), according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 5A illustrates the first switchable lens device 1 10a and the second switchable lens device 1 10b, with respective first and second optical axes 60a and 60b of the first and second eyes oriented to define a first angle ⁇ 1 therebetween, at which the eyes are focused on first object at first distance from the subject.
  • FIG. 5B shows the first and second eye focused on a second object that is closer than the first object, and the first and second optical axes 60a, 60b define a second angle ⁇ 2 that is smaller than the first angle ⁇ .
  • the first switchable lens device 1 10a includes a first field sensor 140a and a first acceleration sensor 145a operably coupled to a controller 130a including control electrical circuitry (e.g., the first field sensor 140a, first acceleration sensor 145a, or controller 130a can be embedded in one or more portions of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, such as in the haptics 1 12a of the first switchable lens device 1 10a).
  • the controller 130a can be operably coupled to first lens 1 1 la of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, such as to switch or direct switching of the focal length of the first lens 1 1 la at least between two different focal lengths.
  • the first switchable lens device 1 10a can include a first acceleration sensor 145a
  • the second switchable lens device 1 10b can include a second acceleration sensor 145b
  • the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b can be operably associated with the respective first and second eyes of the subject, such that movement of the first eye correspondingly moves the first switchable lens device 1 10a, and movement of the second eye moves the second switchable lens device 1 10b.
  • the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b of the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b can detect the movement of the eyes.
  • the controller 130a can determine a change in vergence between the eyes based on the determined acceleration, velocity, or position (or change in position) of each of the eyes. Additionally, the controller 130a can distinguish the change in vergence between the first eye and second eye and tilt of the first eye or the second eye. For example, when tilted, the optical axes 60a, 60b of the first and second eyes can be oriented substantially parallel to each other, while when focused on an object in front of the subject, the optical axes 60a, 60b can be oriented at non parallel angles (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 5A-5B), where the first and second angles ⁇ , ⁇ 2 are non- zero angles.
  • the controller 130a can determine the first and second angles ⁇ , ⁇ 2 based on the change in one or more of the acceleration, velocity, or angular position or orientation of the first and second eyes. Moreover, the controller 130a can determine the first and second angles ⁇ , ⁇ 2 based on the change the field or one or more of the components thereof, as detected by the field sensor 140a or 140b. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can determine one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye based on the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor 145a and one or more second signals received from the second acceleration sensor 145b.
  • the controller 130a can include or can be operably connected to a data table that can correlate one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye with the vergence between the eyes.
  • the subject can train the controller 130a or generate the table responsive to prompts from the controller 130a.
  • the controller 130 can generate the one or more switching signals responsive to the detected change in vergence between the first eye and second eye, and detection of the change in vergence between the eyes can be based on determined acceleration or velocity of the eyes (e.g., angular acceleration or velocity determined by the controller 130 based on one or more signals received from the acceleration sensor(s)).
  • at least one acceleration sensor can be located outside of the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b.
  • at least one acceleration sensor can be positioned remotely from the subject's first and second eyes.
  • the controller 130a can include or can be operably connected to a storage that includes or stores signal samples corresponding to signal noise.
  • the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b while the subject is not moving the eye and standing still, while the subject is walking, while the subject is driving, etc. (e.g., to identify noise signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b under different conditions when the subject is not moving the eyes).
  • the controller 130a can filter out or ignore one or more signals or portions of the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, which correspond or similar to the noise signals previously received by the controller 130a (e.g., during calibration of the controller 130a).
  • the noise characteristics of the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b can change over time.
  • the controller 130a can be configured to retest or rest the stored noise signals.
  • the subject can periodically perform various activities without moving eyes and provide feedback or input to the controller 130a that can correlate various conditions of the subject, such as walking, sitting, driving, etc., with noise signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b.
  • the controller 130a can reject or filter out signals related to or indicative of up and down movements of the eyes.
  • the controller 130a can determine orientation of the subject's head relative to gravitational vector. Moreover, as described herein, based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, the controller 130a can determine direction of movement of the subject's eyes relative to the head of the subject. For example, the controller 130a can determine movement of the subject's eyes relative to the gravitational vector and correlate the determined movement to the orientation of the subject's head relative to the gravitational vector to determine the movement of the eyes relative to the head.
  • the controller 130a can be configured to differentiate at least one noise signal and at least one detection signal by comparing magnitude of a signal to the magnitude of a second signal and by identifying the first signal as the at least one noise signal. For example, both the first and second signals can be received from the same acceleration sensor (e.g., from the first acceleration sensor 145a or from the second sensor 145b).
  • the controller 130a can filter out signals below a certain magnitude threshold. For example, the controller 130a can determine an average signal level while the subject is not moving the eyes and filter out or subtract signals below the threshold of the average signal level.
  • the magnetic field source 150b can establish an identifiable magnetic field 50b that can be sensed by the first field sensor 140a. More specifically, for example, the first field sensor 140a can detect the change in orientation or location of the identifiable magnetic field 50b. It should be also appreciated that the magnetic field source 50b can be positioned or secured in the subject's second eye without the second switchable lens device 1 10b (e.g., the magnetic field source 50b can be implanted in the eye, such as in the sclera of the eye). In any event, in one or more embodiments, the magnetic field source 150b can move and tilt together with the second eye (correspondingly moving the identifiable magnetic field 50b), and the first field sensor 140a can detect the change in the orientation or location of the identifiable magnetic field 50b.
  • any of the elements or components described herein as included in one or more switchable lens devices can be directly implanted in the eye or secured to the eye, without implanting or otherwise associating a switchable lens device in that eye (e.g., a controller, an acceleration sensor, a field source, a field sensor, etc., can be implanted directly in the eye).
  • a switchable lens device e.g., a controller, an acceleration sensor, a field source, a field sensor, etc.
  • the magnetic field source 50b can be any suitable magnet, which can establish any suitable magnetic field that can vary from one embodiment to the next.
  • the magnetic field source 50b is a dipole magnet, such as a permanent magnet (e.g., a ferromagnet).
  • the magnetic field source 50b can be a dipole electromagnet.
  • the magnetic field source 50b can generate a magnetic field having both a dipole and a non-dipole contribution. In such an embodiment, the non-dipole contributions generally weaken more with distance from the magnetic field source 50b than do the dipole contributions so that at a sufficient distance from the magnetic field source 50b (e.g., at the sensor location 140a), the dominant contribution is that of a magnetic dipole.
  • the first field sensor 140a can be any suitable sensor or multiple sensors, which can be sufficiently miniaturized for placement in the subject's eye (e.g., MEMS based sensors that can be embedded in or mounted on the first switchable lens device 110a).
  • suitable sensors include Hall effect sensors, magnetoresi stance sensors (e.g., AMR magnetometer, GMR magnetometer), induction coils, magneto-diodes, Lorentz force based sensors, Electron Tunneling based sensor, MEMS compass, etc.
  • the first field sensor 140a can be or can include any suitable sensor or combination of sensors that can detect the change in the location or orientation of the identifiable magnetic field 50b.
  • the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented such that the first field sensor 140a or the controller 130a can distinguish between in-tilt or convergence of the eyes (e.g., when the subject attempts to change focus on from a first object to a second object that is closer to the subject) from co-tilt of the eyes (e.g., when the subject tilts or pivots eyes to focus on an object located peripherally, such as to the left or to the right of the subject).
  • the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented at about 45° relative to the second optical axis 60b (e.g., within less than 1° of the 45°, within less than 2° of the 45°, within less than 5° of the 45°).
  • the first field sensor 140a is mounted or embedded within the first switchable lens device 110a so that as the first eye tilts, changing the direction of first optical axis 60a and first switchable lens device 110a, the sensitivity direction of the first field sensor 140a also changes. Accordingly, the value of a specific directional component of magnetic field measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of the first eye. It should be further appreciated, that the value of a specific directional component of magnetic field measured by the first field sensor 140a will also be changed by changes in the direction the magnetic field source 50b, and the accompanying changes in the field at the location of the first field sensor 140a.
  • the second switchable lens device 110b can include multiple magnets that can establish multiple identifiable magnetic fields. Moreover, a single identifiable magnetic field oriented at an acute or obtuse angle relative to the second optic axis 60b can be represented by superpositioning two or more identifiable magnetic fields established by multiple magnets.
  • the controller 130a can determine change in vergence between the first and second eyes of the subject responsive to the signals received from the field sensor 140a and from the acceleration sensors 145a or 145b. For example, the controller 130a can make a first determination of whether movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence or a tilt of the eyes based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, as described above. The controller 130a can make a second determination of whether movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence or tilt of the eye based on the signals received from the field sensor 140a.
  • the controller 130a can make a third determination of the position or change in vergence by comparing the first determination to the second determination (e.g., when the first and second determinations indicate a change in vergence, the controller 130a can make the third determination that the movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence). Moreover, the controller 130a determined the value of the change in vergence by comparing the first and second determined changes in the vergence (e.g., by taking an average of the first and second determined changes in the vergence). In an embodiment, the controller 130a can generate a switching signal based on the third determination (e.g., the controller 130a can switch or direct switching of the first or second lens 1 1 1a, 1 1 1b responsive to the third determination).
  • the controller 130a can determine that the first determination of change in vergence (e.g., determination based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b) is different than the second determination of change in version (e.g., determination based on the signals received from the field sensor).
  • the first determination can indicate that the subject's eyes are tilting, while the second determination can indicate that the subject' s eye are converging or diverging, or vice versa.
  • the controller 130a can be configured to generate a third determination that corresponds to maintaining the optical settings (e.g., the focal length) of the first or second lens 1 1 1a, 1 1 lb.
  • the switchable lens device can include any number of suitable switchable lenses that can be associated with the first or second eye of the subject to provide corrective focusing for the corresponding eye of the subject.
  • FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a switchable lens systems 100c, lOOd worn by subject 70.
  • the switchable lens system 100c includes switchable lens devices 1 10c, HOd.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10c can include a first switchable contact lens that can be positioned in the first eye 20 of the subject 70, and the switchable lens device HOd can include a second switchable contact lens HOd that can be positioned in second eye 30 of the subject 70.
  • the switchable lens system 100c can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein.
  • the switchable lens system 100c can include one or more acceleration sensors that can be associated with the first eye 20 or second eye 30 and detect respective movements thereof, as described above.
  • the switchable lens system 100c can include an acceleration sensor 146c, that can be positioned remotely from the first eye 20 or second eye 30.
  • the acceleration sensor 146c can be positioned on or mechanically connected to the head of the subject 70 (e.g., such as to detect movement of the subject 70 or movement of the subject' s head).
  • the acceleration sensor 146c can be operably coupled to the controller.
  • the controller can receive one or more signals from the acceleration sensor 146c.
  • the signals received from the acceleration sensor 146c can be processed or used by the controller to filter out noise from the acceleration sensors associated with the first eye 20 or with the second eye 30 and sensing the respective motion or acceleration thereof.
  • the acceleration sensor 146c is shown as positioned between the first and second eyes 20, 30 of the subject 70.
  • the acceleration sensor 146c can be implanted under the skin of the subject 70 (e.g., near the nose of the subject 70). It should be appreciated, however, that the acceleration sensor 146c can be located at any suitable location (e.g., as described above).
  • the controller or one or more portions thereof can be located at any number of suitable locations.
  • one or more portions of the controller can be included in a personal electronic device (e.g., the portable electronic device can include an acceleration sensor or can receive one or more signals from one or more acceleration sensors, such as from the acceleration sensor 146a).
  • the acceleration sensor 146c can be operably connected to the controller with any number of suitable connections (e.g., hardwired or wireless).
  • a switchable lens device HOe can include or can be coupled to a communication device 200 (e.g., at least one receiver, transmitter, transceiver, or combinations thereof) that can receive data or instructions related to modification of the focal length(s) of one or more switchable lenses of the switchable lens device 1 lOe.
  • a switchable lens system can include the controller 130e (e.g., the controller 130e can receive one or more signals and can determine vergence rotation of the eye and/or suitable focal length for the switchable lenses of the switchable lens device HOe).
  • the controller 130e can include I/O interface 220, processor 230, and memory 240 operably coupled together.
  • the controller 130e can include a database 250 (e.g., the database 340 and can have data stored in a storage memory of the controller 130e).
  • the controller 130e can store one or more parameters in the database 340 (e.g., the controller 130e can store training or tuning data in the database 340).
  • a communication device 210 (e.g., at least one receiver, transmitter, transceiver, or combinations thereof) can be operably coupled to the controller 130e and/or integrated therewith.
  • the communication device 210 can be operably coupled to the communication device 200 (e.g., via wired or wireless connection), such that the switchable lens device 1 lOe and the controller 130e can transmit and receive data from one another.
  • display 260 and/or input device 270 e.g., physical or virtual keyboard, microphone, etc.
  • input device 270 e.g., physical or virtual keyboard, microphone, etc.
  • a user e.g., a subject using and/or wearing the switchable lens device HOe
  • the controller 130e can be operably coupled to and/or incorporated with any number of suitable devices, such as personal electronic devices (e.g., personal computers, smart phones, tablets, etc.) and/or any other computing and/or input devices.
  • personal electronic devices e.g., personal computers, smart phones, tablets, etc.
  • any other computing and/or input devices e.g., multi-focus lens systems, IOL systems, etc.
  • any of the systems described herein e.g., multi-focus lens systems, IOL systems, etc.
  • Embodiments disclosed herein are directed to switchable lens devices and systems, such as IOL devices and IOL systems, and methods that include controlling the switching of the switchable lenses.
  • the switchable lenses can have multiple optical settings and can be switched from one optical setting to another (e.g., responsive to one or more switching signals from a controller).
  • the controller can receive one or more inputs from a user and can switch or direct switching of one or more switchable lenses.
  • the controller can automatically (e.g., without a command from the user or responsive to a signal from one or more sensors detecting a non-command input, event, or condition) switch the switchable lens from a first optical setting to a second optical setting, and can switch back to the first optical setting, from the second optical setting, responsive to an override command or input received from the user (e.g., from the subject wearing the switchable lens).
  • the automatic switching of the switchable lens or switching without a command from the subject can be performed responsive to one or more signals received at the controller and correlated to one or more indicators that a vergence between the subject's eyes has changed.
  • the switchable lens device or system can include one or more sensors that can detect motion of subject's eyes or correlate motion of the subject's eye with change in vergence therebetween.
  • the controller can receive one or more signals from such sensors and can switch the switchable lens from a first optical setting (e.g., a first focal length) to a second optical setting (e.g., a second focal length).
  • switching from one optical setting to another can include a predetermined or selected time delay therebetween.
  • the controller can set a time for switching the switchable lenses between optical settings, as disclosed in more detail in U.S. Patent Application No. TBD, Attorney Docket No. 260577US01_999008-55, entitled "INTRAOCULAR LENS SYSTEMS AND RELATED METHODS, which is filed concurrently herewith, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
  • a switching time can be received as an input (e.g., from the subject) or can be calculated based on one or more algorithms or formulas and can be stored by the controller.
  • the controller can apply the switching time to the switching of the switchable lenses responsive to sensor input or to the switching of the switchable lenses responsive to input received from the subject (e.g., responsive to commands, such as override commands, received from the subject).
  • the switchable lens system can include any number of suitable sensors that can provide one or more suitable signals to the controller, which can indicate to the controller a change in vergence between the subject' s eyes.
  • the switchable lens systems disclosed herein can include one or more sensors configured to detect one or more physiological indicia of the subject.
  • the switchable lens system can include one or more sensors configured to detect glucose concentration (e.g., in the eye of the subject), eye pressure, heart rate, biological proteins present in the eye, or any other biological indicia.
  • the one or more sensors can be operably coupled to the controller.
  • the controller of the switchable lens system can be configured to transmit the measurements of the physical indicia to a remote source such as a computer, a cellular phone, or other electronic device.
  • the measured physical indicia may be used to determine the health of a subject or eye thereof, customize the operation of the switchable lens device to the particular subject, determine if the controller needs to be removed or adjusted, or determine if the focal adjustments of the controller are suitable for the subject.
  • the electronic device may then transmit instructions to the controller to selectively control or otherwise adjust the functioning of the switchable lens system, such as controllably changing the focal length of the switchable lens device.
  • the subject may desire to have one or more of the switchable lenses switch to the previous optical setting (e.g., to the optical setting of the switchable lenses before the non-command switching described above).
  • the controller can include or can be operably coupled to one or more input devices or sensors that can detect or receive inputs from the subject (e.g., override inputs or commands, to change the current optical setting of the switchable lens to a previous optical setting).
  • the controller can be operably coupled to an audio detection device, such as a microphone (e.g., piezo microphone, laser microphone, condenser microphone, etc.).
  • the controller can receive one or more audible inputs and can correlate the audible inputs to one or more optical settings for the switchable lens(es) or to one or more switching commands.
  • the controller can switch or direct switching of one or more switchable lenses responsive to the switching commands (e.g., switching command can be correlated to a specific optical setting for one or more of the switchable lenses).
  • the controller can include or can be operably coupled to one or more motion or gesture detection sensors.
  • the sensors can detect one or more selected movements or gestures (e.g., gestures made by the subject).
  • the controller can receive one or more signals from the motion or gesture detection sensors and can correlate subject' s gestures or movements with one or more switching commands.
  • the controller responsive to one or more switching commands received from the subject, can change one or more optical settings of one or more of the switchable lenses, as described herein.
  • the switchable lens can be configured to switch between two or more focal lengths.
  • FIG. 1 schematically illustrates eyes 20 and 30 of a subject focused on a first object 10 that is positioned at a first distance from the subject.
  • FIG. 1 also schematically illustrates a switchable lens system 100, according to an embodiment.
  • switchable lens system 100 can include a first switchable lens device 1 10 positioned in a first eye 20 and a second switchable lens device 1 10' positioned in a second eye 30 of the subject.
  • the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10' can be configured to augment or correct visual deficiencies of the subject or to replace the lenses in the respective first eye 20 or second eye 30 of the subject (e.g., in cataract surgeries).
  • the switchable lens system 100 can include only a single switchable lens device (e.g., the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10'), which can be associated with or positioned in the first eye 20 or in the second eye 30.
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to or set at a first optical setting, such as a first focal length.
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to a second optical setting, such as a second focal length.
  • a second optical setting such as a second focal length.
  • the subject's eyes 20, 30 can tilt such as to converge, thereby changing the angle between the optical axes thereof.
  • FIG. 2 schematically shows the subject's eyes 20, 30 focused on a second object 90, which is positioned at a second distance and closer to the subject than the first object 10 (FIG. 1).
  • the angle between the optical axes thereof can change to a second angle ⁇ 2 . More specifically, as the eyes 20, 30 focus on the closer, second object 90, the eyes 20, 30 converge or in-tilt, such that the second angle ⁇ 2 defined by the respective optical axis thereof is greater than the first angle ⁇ .
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to the second focal length, which can be shorter than the first focal length.
  • the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can include one or more sensors that can sense or detect a one or more instructions or inputs (e.g., one or more inputs from the subject) and can correlate the one or more inputs from the subject to a change in vergence rotation between the eyes 20, 30 (e.g., convergence to focus on a closer object or divergence to focus on a farther object) or to a request or command to change one or more optical settings of the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' (e.g., to change a focal length, to change visible-light transmittance, to change focal spot, etc.).
  • switchable lenses can have any number of optical settings, and the controller can directly or indirectly select at least one of the optical settings for the switchable lens.
  • the switchable lens devices e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 or switchable lens device 1 10'
  • the switchable lens devices described herein may have optical settings with a single optical parameter (e.g., focal length, light transmittance, etc.) or multiple optical parameters.
  • FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate the switchable lens device 1 10, according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 8A is a top view of the switchable lens device 1 10
  • FIG. 8B is a side view of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the switchable lens 1 10' (FIGS. 8A-8B) can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a switchable lens 1 1 1 and haptics 1 12 connected to or integrated with the switchable lens 1 1 1.
  • the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on or secured to one or more structures in the eye, thereby positioning or securing the switchable lens device 1 10 in the eye.
  • the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on the ciliary body or muscles or in or on the capsular bag of the natural lens of the eye.
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be located laterally in the center of the eye with the haptics 1 12 extending laterally therefrom.
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10 can be switched between two or more optical settings (e.g., two or more focal lengths, to focus light entering the eye from a selected distance on the retina of the eye), thereby augmenting or correcting the vision of the subject.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be substantially fixed within the eye (e.g., switchable lens device can be substantially immobile relative to the optical axis of the eye). As such, for example, movement of the eye 20 can result in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10. In particular, as the eye 20 tilts or pivots in the eye socket, the switchable lens device 1 10 can correspondingly tilt or pivot together with the eye. Furthermore, one, some, or all of the elements or components of the switchable lens device 1 10 can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye or relative to the optical axis thereof, as described below in more detail.
  • a controller 130 that can include control electrical circuitry can be operably coupled to the switchable lens 1 1 1 and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 between two or more optical settings (e.g., between two or more focal lengths).
  • the controller 130 can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • a controller 130 can be mounted on, embedded in, or otherwise mechanically connected to the haptics 1 12 (e.g., as schematically shown in FIG. 8B). Additionally or alternatively, the controller 130 can be mounted on, embedded in, or otherwise mechanically connected to the switchable lens 1 1 1 or any other suitable portion of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include one or more sensors that can detect or sense inputs, events, or conditions that can be related to or associated with the change of vergence between the eyes of the subject (e.g., sensors that can detect movement or direction of movement of the first or second eye of the subject).
  • the controller 130 can be operably coupled to and can receive detection outputs from a field sensor 190 that can be operably (e.g., mechanically) coupled to one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., to the haptics 1 12).
  • the field sensor 190 can include a single or multiple sensors that can detect presence or changes in a magnetic field.
  • the field sensor 190 can move together with the subject's eye and can detect a change in an established identifiable field (e.g., a magnetic field that can be established at a suitable location relative to the field sensor 190 or relative to the switchable lens device).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a field source 150 that can establish an identifiable field.
  • Another field sensor e.g., located externally to the switchable lens device 1 10) can detect the change in the field as the field source 150 moves together with the switchable lens device 1 10 that can move together with the eye of the subject.
  • Field sources, field sensors, and switchable device and controller configurations that are suitable for determining the change in vergence between the first and second eyes of the subject (e.g., for switching the switchable lens from the first optical setting to the second optical setting, such as from the first focal length to the second focal length) are disclosed in more detail in U. S. Patent Application No. 19/807,719, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include an acceleration sensor 191 that can be operably coupled to the controller 130.
  • the acceleration sensor 191 can also include a single accelerometer, gyroscope, etc., or multiple accelerometers, gyroscopes, etc., (e.g., two or more of which can be arranged in an array).
  • the acceleration sensor 191 can move together with the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., together with the eye of the subject), and the controller 130 can receive one or more signals from the acceleration sensor 191, which can be related to the movement detected by the acceleration sensors.
  • the controller 130 can determine the change in vergence between the subject's first and second eyes, as described in more detail in U. S. Patent Application No. 15/267,526, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
  • the switchable lens device can include a physiological characteristic sensor (not shown).
  • physiological characteristic sensor can detect one or more physiological characteristics or changes therein, such as glucose concentration (e.g., in the eye of the subject), eye pressure, heart rate, biological proteins present in the eye, or any other biological indicia.
  • the controller 130 can determine one or more focus-related characteristics based on the activity of the subject's ciliary muscles.
  • the physiological characteristic sensor can detect activity of the ciliary muscle(s) of the subject and can generate one or more signals responsive thereto (e.g., the signal(s) generated by the physiological sensor(s) can be related to the change in vergence between the eyes of the subject).
  • the physiological characteristic sensor can be operably coupled to the controller 130, and the controller 130 can receive one or more signals from the physiological characteristic sensor and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 based at least partially on one or more signals received from the physiological characteristic sensor.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include one, some, or all of the sensors described above, which can be operably coupled to the controller 130 and can send one or more signals thereto; the controller 130 can determine or estimate change in vergence between the subject's eyes based at least partially on the signals received from such sensors.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include one or more additional or alternative sensors (e.g., as described below in more detail) that can be operably coupled to the controller 130, and based on signals from which the controller 130 can determine or estimate change in vergence between the subject's eyes.
  • the subject may desire to override the optical setting selected by or switched to by the controller 130 or to switch to a different optical setting than the optical setting selected by or switched to by the controller 130 (e.g., responsive to controller 130 making the determination of change in vergence).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can detect or receive one or more inputs from the subject, which can indicate or can be correlated to a command for switching to a previous optical setting.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 e.g., the controller 130 of the switchable lens device 1 10) can receive audible or gesture inputs and correlate the inputs to one or more switching or override commands.
  • the controller 130 can receive a detection output from an input sensor 192.
  • the detection output can be related or can correspond to one or more commands or selections for one or more optical settings (e.g., for a single optical setting for one or more switchable lenses or for multiple optical settings for two or more switchable lenses).
  • the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a selected or predetermined optical setting, such as a previous optical setting.
  • the controller 130 can correlate the signals received from the input sensor 192 to one or more override commands or optical settings (e.g., default optical settings).
  • the input sensor 192 can detect audible input or commands provided by the subject.
  • the subject can provide an audible command that can be detected by the input sensor 192, and, based at least partially on the signals received from the input sensor 192, which can be related to the audible command provided by the subject, the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a selected optical setting.
  • the commands provided by the subject can override the optical that was previously determined or selected by the controller 130 (e.g., as mentioned above, the controller 130 can select an optical setting or switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a selected optical setting based at least partially on one or more non-command inputs, events, or conditions determined by one or more sensors operably coupled to the controller 130).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be configured to switch between two or more discrete optical settings.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can have set or specific focal lengths to which the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be switched (e.g., a first focal length for viewing nearby objects and a second focal length for viewing objects at a distance).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can be switched between two or more discrete settings for the visible-light transmittance through the switchable lens 1 1 1.
  • any optical setting may involve at least one optical parameter, such as focal length, focal or optical power (e.g., magnification), light transmission, focal position, etc.
  • at least one optical setting includes multiple optical parameters.
  • the controller 130 can store (directly or indirectly (e.g., the controller 130 can be operably coupled to a storage)) multiple optical settings and corresponding optical parameters thereof.
  • the controller 130 can store multiple optical settings and corresponding switching commands (e.g., audible commands or inputs) for switching to each optical setting.
  • the controller 130 can include or can be operably coupled to a table that correlated multiple optical settings with corresponding optical parameters and switching commands (e.g., commands that can be received from the subject) or signals (e.g., signals that can be received from the input sensor 192).
  • the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 from a first focal length to a second focal length (e.g., responsive to a command received from the subject or responsive to a non-command input).
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 at the first focal length, can have a different focal or optical power than at the second focal length.
  • the subject can provide input or command (e.g., that can be detected by the input sensor 192), and the controller 130 can change the focal length or the optical power of the switchable lens 1 1 1 responsive to the command received from the subject (e.g., overriding previously selected focal length or optical power of the switchable lens 1 1 1, as may be selected by the controller 130 responsive to a non-command input).
  • input or command e.g., that can be detected by the input sensor 192
  • the controller 130 can change the focal length or the optical power of the switchable lens 1 1 1 responsive to the command received from the subject (e.g., overriding previously selected focal length or optical power of the switchable lens 1 1 1, as may be selected by the controller 130 responsive to a non-command input).
  • the input sensor 192 can detect one or more inputs that can be correlated to a selection of at least one optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1. For example, as described below in more detail, responsive to the signal(s) received from the input sensor 192, the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a selected optical settings (e.g., the controller 130 can generate one or more switching signals that can be based on or responsive to the signal(s) received from the input sensor 192).
  • the input sensor 192 can include one or more audio or sounds sensors or detectors (e.g., a microphone).
  • the input sensor 192 can detect an audio input or command, and the controller 130 can receive one or more signals from the input sensor 192, which can correspond to the audio input(s) detected by the input sensor 192.
  • the controller 130 can correlate the audio input(s) detected by the input sensor 192 or the signals received from the input sensor 192 to one or more switching commands or to one or more optical settings for the switchable lens 1 1 1.
  • the subject wearing or using the switchable lens device 1 10 can provide an audible command requesting that the switchable lens device 1 10 switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 from a first optical setting to a second optical setting, or vice versa.
  • the input sensor 192 can detect the audible command provided by the subject, and responsive to the detection of the audible command at the input sensor 192, the controller 130 can receive one or more signals from the input sensor 192. Moreover, as discussed above, the controller 130 can correlate the one or more signals received from the input sensor 192 to one or more optical settings corresponding thereto and requested by the subject. Responsive to the audible command (e.g., from the subject), the controller 130 also can switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 from the first optical setting to the second optical setting, from the second optical setting to a third optical setting, and so on, by switching or directing the switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to the optical setting that corresponds to the command detected by the input sensor 192.
  • the controller 130 Responsive to the audible command (e.g., from the subject), the controller 130 also can switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 from the first optical setting to the second optical setting, from the second optical setting to a third optical setting, and so on, by switching or directing
  • the controller 130 can correlate an audible command or input (e.g., from the subject) with an optical setting for the switchable lens 11 1.
  • an audible command can be a voice command.
  • the controller 130 can correlate verbal audible commands or sounds, such as subject speaking out loud a phrase, a number, a parameter, etc., with a selected optical setting.
  • the controller 130 can be programmed or configured to filter out voice commands from persons other than the subject.
  • the controller 130 can be configured or programmed to distinguish the voice of the subject from persons other than the subject.
  • audible commands can include non-verbal commands.
  • the non-verbal commands can include any suitable or repeatable sound or noise that can be associated with a specific optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1.
  • suitable non-verbal commands can include clacking of teeth, clapping, clicking, etc.
  • the controller 130 can be configured to correlate non-verbal commands to specific or corresponding optical settings. For example, the subject can train the controller 130 to correlate a clicking sound with a first optical setting, and clacking of teeth with a second optical setting.
  • a command for switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a suitable or selected optical setting can involve a series, a sequence, or a pattern of non-verbal commands or sounds. For example, a selected number of repeated claps, clicks, combinations thereof, etc., can be correlated with a selection for a specific optical setting. In an embodiment, the selected number of non-verbal or repeated commands must be provided by the subject within a selected time period.
  • the controller 130 can filter out verbal or non-verbal inputs (or signals received from the input sensor 192, which correspond to the verbal and non-verbal inputs) that do not correspond to a command input (e.g., verbal or non-verbal inputs that do not include or correspond to a selected sound, selected number of repeats of the sound(s) time period within which the sound(s) were repeated, etc.).
  • the controller 130 can be configured to correlate the input received from the subject or from the input sensor 192 with selected period of time.
  • the selected period of time can be the time period from the time of switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., to a selected setting based on non-command related signal(s) received from one or more sensors) to the time of receiving suitable input from the input sensor 192 (e.g., the subject' s input, such as audible input, or command must be received at the controller 130 within a selected period of time after the controller 130 switched or directed switching of the switchable lens, such as responsive to one or more non-command signals or inputs that can be received from one or more sensors).
  • suitable input e.g., the subject' s input, such as audible input, or command must be received at the controller 130 within a selected period of time after the controller 130 switched or directed switching of the switchable lens, such as responsive to one or more non-command signals or inputs that can be received from one or more sensors.
  • the selected period of time can be the time period from the time of switching between an enabled state for sensor-based switching and a disabled state for sensor-based switching, to the time of receiving suitable input from the input sensor 192 (e.g., the subject' s input, such as audible input, or command must be received at the controller 130 within a selected period of time after the controller 130 switched or directed switching between an enabled and a disabled state for sensor-based switching.
  • suitable input e.g., the subject' s input, such as audible input, or command must be received at the controller 130 within a selected period of time after the controller 130 switched or directed switching between an enabled and a disabled state for sensor-based switching.
  • the controller 130 can filter out signals received from the input sensor 192, which are received at the controller 130 outside of the selected time period or which do not correspond to a command for switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 from one optical setting to another.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include any number of suitable sensors or detectors that can detect any number of inputs (e.g., inputs from the subject using the switchable lens device 110); the sensors or detectors can generate one or more signals responsive to such inputs, and the signals can be correlated by the controller 130 to one or more optical settings.
  • the optical settings for the switchable lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10 can involve any number of suitable optical properties.
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be switchable between two or more focal lengths.
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be configured to switch between at least two different optical settings (e.g., between two different focal lengths) responsive to one or more electrical inputs.
  • the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 between two or more optical settings by generating a suitable electrical signal.
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be an electrically-modifiable diffractive lens, such as the electrically-modifiable lenses described in more detail in U. S. Application No. 19/807,673, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be liquid crystal lens (e.g., a liquid crystal lens with an electrically tunable focal length).
  • the controller 130 can be configured to compare or correlate the inputs from the subject or the signals received from the input sensor 192 to one or more approved inputs (e.g., the controller 130 can receive or include one or more approved inputs that can be stored in the controller 130, such as in a table or database).
  • the approved inputs can correspond to one or more optical settings (e.g., first, second, etc., optical settings can be correlated to corresponding first, second, etc., approved inputs).
  • the controller 130 can distinguish inputs from the subject that correspond to approved inputs from other inputs that do not correspond to approved inputs (e.g., to differentiate between a command provided by the subject to switch to an optical setting, such as a previous optical setting, and a non-command sound or gesture made by the subject).
  • approved inputs may be in any suitable form (e.g., the controller 130 can differentiate a first signal from the input sensor 192, which can be correlated to an approved input, from a second signal from the input sensor 192, which does not correlate to an approved input).
  • one or more approved inputs can be based on one or more environmental conditions or settings (e.g., of the subject or of the switchable lens device 1 10).
  • one or more sensors or detectors of the switchable lens device 1 10 e.g., the acceleration sensor 191, physiological characteristics sensor, etc.
  • environmental conditions can include any suitable condition that can facilitate correcting a potentially inaccurate determination of an optical setting by the controller 130.
  • environmental conditions can include a determination of the speed of movement of the subject, which can be correlated to the location of the subject (e.g., standing, walking, running, driving, flying, etc.).
  • the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 11 responsive to one or more non-command signals from one or more sensors (e.g., responsive to one or more signals received from the field sensor 190), where the second focal length focuses the switchable lens 1 1 1 on an object closer that at the first focal length.
  • the subject can provide one or more audible or gesture inputs (as described herein) to switch to the first focal length or to another focal length.
  • an input from the subject can be correlated by the controller 130 to the first focal length and to the second focal length (e.g., due to the noise, such as in an audible input).
  • the controller 130 can correlate the input or distinguish the signal based on one or more environmental conditions (e.g., where the controller 130 determines that the subject is driving, the controller 130 can favor or weigh heavier the probability that the input received from the subject corresponds to the first focal length, focusing on the farther object).
  • the subject may request the controller 130 to switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a first optical setting, under which the switchable lens 1 1 1 can have a first position relative to the haptics 1 12, a first focal length, and a first visible-light- transmittance setting.
  • a first optical setting under which the switchable lens 1 1 1 can have a first position relative to the haptics 1 12, a first focal length, and a first visible-light- transmittance setting.
  • any number of suitable commands or inputs e.g., audible input, gesture inputs (described below), etc.
  • the controller 130 e.g., via the detection at the input sensor 192, which the subject can input the switching command or request to change from one optical setting to another).
  • the input(s) or commands received from the subject can include information corresponding to an optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., the optical setting that was set for the switchable lens 1 1 1 before the switchable lens 1 1 1 was switched, such as responsive to one or more non-command signals received by the controller 130 from one or more sensors).
  • the subject may speak a phrase (e.g., "first setting") that can be detected by the input sensor 192, and, responsive to the signals received from the input sensor 192, the controller 130 can generate a switching signal, switch, or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to the selected or corresponding optical setting.
  • the audible input or spoken command can refer or correspond to a previous optical setting (e.g., optical setting that was set for the switchable lens 1 1 1 before the change by the controller 130, such as before the change responsive non-command input, event, or condition).
  • the controller 130 can correlate one or more signals received from the input sensor 192 detecting the subject speaking a suitable word or phrase (e.g., "go back") to one or more previously set optical settings.
  • the controller 130 can store one or more previous optical settings that were set for the switchable lens 1 1 1 and can retrieve the store optical setting(s) responsive to the corresponding commands received from the subject or signals received from the input sensor 192.
  • the controller 130 can switch or direct switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 to the corresponding selected or retrieved optical setting (e.g., corresponding to the command received from the subject).
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include any number of suitable sensors (e.g., field sensor 190, acceleration sensor 191, video detector, etc.) that can detect any number of non-command inputs, events, or conditions and provide corresponding signals to the controller 130 for determining one or more suitable optical settings for the switchable lens 1 1 1.
  • the controller 130 can receive one or more inputs or commands from the subject (e.g., audible commands as described above) that the controller 130 can correlate to a selection of one or more sensors or inputs, events, or conditions detected thereby that the controller 130 can use or accept for determining an optical setting (e.g., focal length) for the switchable lens 1 1 1.
  • an optical setting e.g., focal length
  • the controller 130 can block or ignore signals from one or more sensors (e.g., the controller 130 can ignore signals received from the acceleration sensor 191 and accept signals received from the field sensor 190 for determining the focal length for the switchable lens 1 1 1).
  • the controller 130 can be configured or programmed according to a plurality of algorithms that can be selected by the controller 130 for determining a suitable optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1.
  • a selected algorithm for determining the suitable optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1 can involve any number of steps or operations that can be performed by the controller 130, and which can involve or require input or signals from any number of suitable input sources (e.g., sensors) and any number of computational or correlative operations therewith (e.g., mathematical operations, operation correlating the input(s) or signal(s) to one or more stored values, etc.).
  • the controller 130 can be programmed or configured to determine the suitable optical setting according to any number of selectable algorithms (e.g., that can be selected by the subject). For example, the controller 130 can base the determination of the optical setting at least partially on the environmental conditions detected by one or more sensors. Additionally or alternatively, the controller 130 can receive one or more inputs or commands from the subject, indicating to select a specific algorithm, according to which the controller 130 can determine or switch to an optical setting (e.g., the controller 130 can process one or more inputs from sensor(s) based on the selected algorithm(s)).
  • selectable algorithms e.g., that can be selected by the subject.
  • the controller 130 can base the determination of the optical setting at least partially on the environmental conditions detected by one or more sensors.
  • the controller 130 can receive one or more inputs or commands from the subject, indicating to select a specific algorithm, according to which the controller 130 can determine or switch to an optical setting (e.g., the controller 130 can process one or more inputs from sensor(s) based on the selected algorithm
  • a first algorithm can include a first set of operations that can require a first set of inputs
  • a second algorithm can include a second set of operations that can require a second set of inputs.
  • the second set of inputs can be different than the first set of inputs.
  • the first set of inputs can include signals from an acceleration sensor and from a field sensor
  • the second set of inputs can include signals only from the field sensor (e.g., the signals from the acceleration sensor may be disregarded when the controller 130 determined the optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1 based on the second algorithm).
  • the subject can provide one or more audible or gesture inputs (e.g., as described herein) that can be detected by the input sensor 192, which can be correlated by the controller 130 to one or more command.
  • the controller 130 can select a suitable algorithm (e.g., the command can include an algorithm selection or one or more parameters that can be correlated by the controller 130 to a suitable algorithm selection).
  • the controller 130 can switch from basing the determination of the optical setting on one algorithm to another (e.g., switch from using the first algorithm to using the second algorithm or vice versa).
  • the controller 130 can switch the optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 1 (as described herein) and switch from one algorithm to another (e.g., based on the same command or input received from the subject).
  • the controller 130 can be configured to stop sensor-based switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., to stop switching the switchable lens 1 11 according to one or more algorithms described herein). For example, the controller 130 can be configured to stop sensor-based switching of the switchable lens 11 1 responsive to one or more inputs or commands received from the subject. Furthermore, the controller 130 can be configured to resume sensor-based switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., responsive to one or more additional or alternative inputs or commands received from the subject, responsive to one or more detected conditions or events, etc.). For example, the controller 130 can switch between an enabled state for sensor-based switching and a disabled state for sensor-based switching.
  • the controller 130 when a state setting is set to an enabled state, can be configured to direct sensor-based switching an optical setting of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting or from the second optical setting to the first optical setting responsive to the one or more sensor signals. Conversely, for example, when the state setting is set to a disabled state, for example, the controller can maintain the optical setting unchanged.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include at least one output device 170.
  • the output device 170 can provide an indication to the subject that the controller 130 received an input from the subject or accepted, or executed a command for switching from one optical setting to another (e.g., a command that corresponds to the input received from the subject).
  • the controller 130 can be operably coupled to the output device 170 and can send one or more signals thereto, indicating that the controller 130 has received one or more signals from the input sensor 192, which correspond to at least one command for switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 from one optical setting to another.
  • the output device 170 responsive to the signal(s) received (directly or indirectly) from the controller 130, the output device 170 can generate an output that is identifiable by the subject.
  • the output device 170 can include a speaker that can generate an audible feedback to the subject.
  • the speaker can produce one or more selected non-verbal sounds, such as beeping, clicking, etc., or one or more selected verbal sounds, such as a spoken word or phrase (e.g., "selection accepted").
  • the output device 170 can include any number of output devices suitable for providing feedback to the subject, which is suitably or sufficiently identifiable by the subject.
  • the output device 170 can include a haptic feedback generator.
  • the output device 170 can vibrate, pulse, etc., in a manner that can be detected or identified by the subject.
  • a selected combination or pattern of haptic feedback can provide the subject with a specific feedback or identification, which can indicate to the subject that the controller 130 received an input from the subject or accepted, or executed a command for switching from one optical setting to another.
  • a short pulse can indicate that the subject's command was accepted by the controller 130, and a longer pulse can indicate that the subject' s command was not accepted by the controller 130.
  • the output device 170 can include a visible indicator.
  • the output device 170 can include a visible indicator.
  • the visible indicator can include lights of one or more selected wavelengths.
  • the light(s) can be produced by a light generator (e.g., LED) that can generate feedback of suitable color, intensity, pattern (e.g., Morse code), etc., to provide suitable feedback to the subject.
  • the switchable lens device 110 can include a communication device 160 (e.g., the controller 130 can be operably coupled to the communication device 160).
  • the communication device 160 can be mounted on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the communication device 160 can be embedded in or mechanically connected to the haptics 1 12 or the switchable lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the communication device 160 can be wireless (e.g., the communication device 160 can be a transmitter or a transceiver) or wired.
  • a wireless (e.g., RF -based or US-based) connection can be established between the communication device 160 and another or additional communication device.
  • the communication device 160 and another communication device can have a wired connection therebetween.
  • an electrical conductor connecting the communication device 160 and another communication device can be implanted in or near the eyes of the subject.
  • the communication device 160 can be operably coupled to the additional communication device, such as to send data therebetween.
  • the controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, or communication device 160 can be operably coupled or connected to a power source.
  • the power source can include a rechargeable energy storage device or battery (not shown) that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the battery can be wirelessly recharged (e.g., a wireless or inductive charger can recharge the battery).
  • the battery can be operably connected to a photovoltaic cell that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the battery can be operably connected or coupled to a charge port that can be configured to accept a charging device.
  • the power source can power one or more of the controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, or communication device 160.
  • the power source may include a parasitic power device, such as an induction coil, one or more photocells, thermoelectric device, or any other device configured to harvest energy from a subject or the environment.
  • the induction coil can include a channel having a magnet therein, the channel passing the induction coil upon movement of the subject (e.g., eye-movement or blinking).
  • an induction coil can be disposed in the eye of a subject (e.g., in or adjacent to the switchable lens) and a corresponding magnet may be positioned on an adjacent part of the subject (e.g., an eyelid or bridge of the nose) whereby movement of the eye or eyelid can cause a current in the induction coil.
  • the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device or multiple switchable lens devices (e.g., a switchable lens device can be located in one or in both eyes of the subject).
  • the switchable lens devices of the switchable lens system can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10. It should be appreciated, however, that any of the switchable lens devices included in the switchable lens systems described herein can include or can be operably coupled to any number of controllers, input sensors, output devices, or combinations thereof, which can be similar to or the same as the controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, and communication device 160.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 is described as including the controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, and communication device 160, configurations of the switchable lens device 110 can vary from one embodiment to the next.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10 can include the switchable lens 1 1 1 , and the controller 130, input sensor 192, or output device 170 can be positioned externally to the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the controller 130, input sensor 192, or output device 170 can be included in an external device, such as a personal electronic device (e.g., subject's smart phone).
  • the subject can wear switchable lens devices in both eyes.
  • a first switchable lens device can include the switchable lens 1 1 1, controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, communication device 160, or any combination thereof
  • the second switchable lens device can include a switchable lens and a communication device operably coupled to the communication device 160 and configured received switching signals therefrom (e.g., the controller 130 can generate switching signals or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 and of a second switchable lens).
  • the switchable lens 1 1 1 is an intraocular lens. It should be appreciated, however, that the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be any other suitable lens, as described below in more detail.
  • the switchable lens can be included in or can form a part of a contact lens that can be worn by the subject. Additionally or alternatively, the switchable lens can be included in one or more devices positionable externally to the subject' s eye. As described below in more detail, for example, the switchable lenses can be included in spectacles, goggles, shields, etc.
  • the input sensor 192 can include any number of sensors suitable for detecting subject' s input.
  • the input sensor 192 can include one or more photocells that can detect the subject's use of eye blinking as an input signal.
  • the input sensor 192 can include one or more motion sensors (e.g., accelerometers) that can detect movements or gestures of the subject (e.g., movements of subject' s head) that can be made by the subject as an input of a command to the controller 130.
  • the controller 130 can correlate one or more signals received from accelerometer(s) to one or more commands for switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., as described above in connection with audible commands). For example, a sequence of nods, turns, etc., of subject' s head can be detected by the input sensor 192, and responsive to such detection, the controller 130 can switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a corresponding optical setting.
  • the controller 130 can receive a one or more inputs from one or more sensors configured to detect one or more physiological characteristics sensor, etc.
  • the detection input(s) from the sensor(s) can be related or correspond to the vergence rotation between the subject's eyes.
  • the controller 130 can switch the lens 1 1 1 to a suitable or predetermined focal length.
  • the controller 130 can be operably coupled to and can receive input(s) from the physiological characteristic sensor(s) that can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • controller 130 is mechanically coupled or connected to the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • the input sensor 192 and output device 170 are physically positioned on or included in the switchable lens device 1 10.
  • controllers, input sensors, output devices, or combinations thereof can be positioned remotely of the switchable lens device, at any number of suitable locations or positions.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates a switchable lens system 100a, according to an embodiment.
  • the switchable lens system 100a can include switchable lens device 1 10a and switchable lens device 1 10a', which can be positioned in the eyes 20 and 30, respectively, of the subject 70. Except as otherwise described herein, the switchable lens device 1 10a and switchable lens device 1 10a' and their respective elements and components can be similar to or the same as any other switchable lens device described herein and their elements and components.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10a or the switchable lens device 1 10a' can include respective switchable lenses that can be controlled by a single controller or each of which can be controlled by a separate controller.
  • the switchable lens system 100a can include a controller that can receive signals from any number of suitable sensors, and the received signals can be related to the change in vergence (e.g., as described above), such that the controller can determine one or more optical settings for the switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10a' or can switch or direct switching of the switchable lenses (of the respective switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10a') responsive to such signals.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10a or the switchable lens device 1 10a' can include fewer elements or components than the switchable lens device 110 (FIGS. 8A- 8B)
  • the switchable lens system 100a can include an input sensor 192a that can be positioned externally to the switchable lens device 1 10a and to the switchable lens device 1 10a' .
  • the input sensor 192a is positioned between the eyes 20, 30 of the subject 70 (e.g., the input sensor 192a can be implanted under the skin of the subject 70). It should be appreciated that the input sensor 192a can be positioned at any number of suitable locations.
  • the input sensor 192a can be operably coupled to one or more controllers of the switchable lens system 100a; the controller(s) can receive one or more signals from the input sensor 192a (e.g., as described above) and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lenses of the switchable lens device 1 10a or switchable lens device 1 10a' . Additionally or alternatively, any other element or component of the switchable lens device 1 10a or switchable lens device 110a' can be positioned externally thereto.
  • the switchable lens device 1 10b and its elements and components can be similar to or the same as any other switchable lens device described herein and their elements and components.
  • the switchable lens system 100b can include controller 130b and input sensor 192b that can be similar to or the same as the controller 130 and input sensor 192 of the switchable lens device 1 10 (FIGS. 8A-8B).
  • the switchable lens system 100b can include an output device 170b.
  • the output device 170b can produce audible signals (e.g., selected sounds, speech-like sounds, etc.), visually identifiable signals (e.g., lights, images, etc.), or tactile signals (e.g., vibrations).
  • the controller 130b and input sensor 192b can be included in or mechanically connected to the frame 1 18B of the spectacles of the switchable lens system 100b. It should be appreciated, however, that the controller 130b, input sensor 192b, or output device 170b can be positioned on any portion of the switchable lens device 110b (e.g., on any portion of the frame 1 18B, on the switchable lens 1 1 1b, on the switchable lens 1 1 1b', etc.).
  • the switchable lens system or switchable lens device can receive one or more non-audible inputs, such as gestures from the subject and can switch to a selected or predetermined optical setting, such as to the previously set optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 1b or 1 1 1b' .
  • the switchable lens system or switchable lens device can include one or more detectors configured to receive or detect gestures provided by the subject.
  • FIGS. 11A-11B illustrate a switchable lens system 100c, according to an embodiment. Except as described there, the switchable lens system 100c and its elements and components can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein and their corresponding elements and components.
  • the cameras of the sensors 190c can have a field-of-view 195c and the cameras of the sensors 190c' can have a field-of-view 195c' .
  • the field- of-view 195c can be suitably sized and configured to capture movement of the eye 20 and the field-of-view 195' can be suitably sized and configured to capture movement of the eye 30.
  • the controller 130c can be operably coupled to the sensors 190c or to the sensors 190c' and can receive signals therefrom.
  • signals received at the controller 130c from the input sensors 190c or input sensors 190c' can be related by the controller 130c to movement of one or more portions the eye 20 or eye 30 of the subject 70.
  • the controller 130 can be configured to determine change in vergence between the eyes based at least partially on the detected movement thereof, as described in more detail in U. S. Patent Application No. 15/079,606 the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
  • the controller 130c can determine one or more focus-related characteristics based on the change in size of the pupil of the subject's eye.
  • the switchable lens system 100c or switchable lens device 1 10c can include one or more sensors (e.g., sensors 190c, 190c') that can be positioned and configured to determine the size of the pupil(s) of the respective eyes of the subject or change in the size of the pupil(s).
  • the controller 130c can determine one or more focus-related characteristics based at least partially on the light reflection from the retina (or retinae) of the subject's eye(s). Moreover, the controller 130c can determine one or more focus- related characteristics based at least partially on the light characteristics surrounding the subject (e.g., based at least partially on the environment proximate to the subject and the ambient illumination level thereof). For example, the sensors 190c or 190c' can detect the light reflected from subject' s retinae or the level of ambient illumination and can generate one or more signals related thereto, which can be received at the controller 130c.
  • the controller 130c can determine the change in vergence between the eyes of the subject and can change or direct changing of the corresponding optical settings of the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' (e.g., change focal length(s) thereof).
  • the controller 130c can be configured to distinguish movements of the eye 20 or of the eye 30 that correspond to one or more gesture commands for changing an optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 lc or of the switchable lens 1 1 1c' from movements of the eye 20 or eye 30 that do not correspond to a gesture command for changing an optical setting.
  • the controller 130c can correlate a gesture command (detected by the sensors 190c or 190c' and received as one or more signals from the sensors 190c or 190c' by the controller 130c) to an optical setting selected by the subject 70 for the switchable lens 1 1 lc or switchable lens 11 1 c', such as to switch the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' to the previously set optical setting (e.g., to the optical setting selected and set by the controller 130c for the switchable lenses 1 1 1c, 1 1 1c' based on the determined or estimated change in vergence between the eyes 20 30 (e.g., from the optical setting that was selected by the controller 130c without a command from the subject 70).
  • a gesture command detected by the sensors 190c or 190c' and received as one or more signals from the sensors 190c or 190c' by the controller 130c
  • an optical setting selected by the subject 70 for the switchable lens 1 1 lc or switchable lens 11 1 c'
  • the fields-of-view 195c or 195c' can be configured such that the sensors 190c or sensors 190c', respectively, can capture blinking of the eye 20 or eye 30.
  • a selected sequence of blinks of the eye 20 or of the eye 30 can correspond to a command for switching an optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' .
  • the controller 130c can receive signals from the sensors 190c or sensors 190c' and can correlate the signals received from the sensors 190c or sensors 190c' to one or more commands for changing to a selected optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' .
  • the controller 130c can change optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' .
  • the selected movements of the eye 20 or eye 30 or movement patterns can correspond to a command for changing to a selected optical setting.
  • the controller 130c can be configured to switch the switchable lens 1 11c or switchable lens 11 1c' from a first optical setting to another optical setting (e.g., to a previous optical setting or to a different optical setting, generally).
  • FIGS. 11A-11B the fields-of-view 195c and 195c' are oriented generally horizontally relative to the eyes 20, 30. It should be appreciated, however, that positions of the cameras of the sensors 190c, 190c' and the orientation of the corresponding fields-of-view 195c and 195c' can vary from one embodiment to the next.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a switchable lens system lOOd, according to an embodiment. Except as otherwise described herein, the switchable lens system lOOd and its elements and components can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein (e.g., similar to or the same as the switchable lens system 100c (FIGS. 12A-12B)).
  • the switchable lens system lOOd can include switchable lens device HOe that can have sensors 190d and sensors 190d' (e.g., as described above, the sensors 190d and sensors 190d' can include one or more cameras).
  • fields-of-view 195d and 195d', of the corresponding sensors 190d, 190d' can be aligned generally vertically relative to the eye 20 and eye 30, respectively.
  • fields-of-view 190c, 190c' FIGS.
  • the input sensors 190d or sensors 190d' can capture movements of one or more portions of the eye 20 or eye 30 (respectively), which can correspond to one or more commands for switching switchable lens 1 1 lc or switchable lens 1 1 lc' to a selected optical setting.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a switchable lens system lOOe, according to an embodiment. Except as described herein, the switchable lens system lOOe and its elements and components can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein.
  • the switchable lens system lOOe can include switchable lens device 1 lOe that includes switchable lens l l le and switchable lens l l le', which can be positioned in front of the eye 20 and eye 30, respectively.
  • the switchable lens system lOOe can include sensor 190e that can be positioned externally to the switchable lens device HOe.
  • the sensor 190e can include at least one camera that can be positionable such that the field-of-view 195e of the camera of the sensor 190e can capture movement of one or more parts of the subject 70.
  • the field-of-view 195e can be suitable to capture movement of the eye 20 or eye 30 of the subject, size of the pupil of the eye 20 or eye 30, light reflected from the retina of the eye 20 or eye 30, level or intensity of ambient light surrounding the subject 70, etc., and can generate one or more signals responsive thereto, as described above.
  • one or more additional or alternative movements of the subject 70 can be correlated with one or more selected optical settings (e.g., movement of the hand, arm, mouth, etc., can be correlated to a command for a selected optical setting).
  • the subject 70 can provide any number of suitable inputs to the controller via one or more selected movements, to select a suitable optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 le or switchable lens 1 1 le'.
  • the switchable lens device 1 lOg can include a controller 130g, a sensor 190g, and a communication device 160g.
  • the sensor 190g can be operably coupled to the controller 130g (e.g., as described above) and can receive or detect one or more inputs from the subject.
  • the sensor 190g can include a microphone, one or more acceleration or motion detectors (e.g., accelerometers), an optical detector, combinations thereof, etc.
  • the controller 130g can receive one or more signals from the communication device 160g (e.g., corresponding or responsive to the signals received from the external controller, such as personal electronic device) and can generate one or more switching signals from the switchable lens 11 lg or 1 1 lg' .
  • the controller of the switchable lens device can include or can be operably coupled to a push-button or a keyed input device and can be configured to switch or direct switching of the optical setting of the switchable lens responsive to input received from the input device (e.g., to a previous or another optical setting, as described above).
  • the controller 130j can include I/O interface 220, processor 230, and memory 290 operably coupled together.
  • the controller 130j can include a database 250 (e.g., the database 390 and can have data stored in a storage memory of the controller 130j).
  • the controller 130j can store one or more parameters in the database 390 (e.g., the controller 130j can store training or tuning data in the database 390).
  • ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • some aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein, in whole or in part, can be equivalently implemented in integrated circuits, as one or more programs running on one or more processors (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more microprocessors), as firmware, or as virtually any combination thereof.
  • any two components so associated can also be viewed as being “operably connected,” or “operably coupled,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated can also be viewed as being “operably couplable,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality.
  • operably couplable include but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components and/or wirelessly interactable and/or wirelessly interacting components and/or logically interacting and/or logically interactable components.
  • one or more components can be referred to herein as
  • any recited operations therein can generally be performed in any order. Examples of such alternate orderings can include overlapping, interleaved, interrupted, reordered, incremental, preparatory, supplemental, simultaneous, reverse, or other variant orderings, unless context dictates otherwise. With respect to context, even terms like "responsive to,” “related to,” or other past-tense adjectives are generally not intended to exclude such variants, unless context dictates otherwise.

Abstract

Embodiments disclosed herein are directed to switchable lens devices, systems, and methods that include determining relative tilt and/or vergence rotation of a subject's eyes and focusing one or more lenses based on the determined vergence rotation, or are related to detecting one or more commands and switching one or more switchable lenses responsive to one or more detected commands.

Description

SWITCHABLE LENS DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND
RELATED METHODS
All subject matter of the Priority Application(s) is incorporated herein by reference to the extent such subject matter is not inconsistent herewith.
BACKGROUND
Switchable lenses, such as intraocular lenses (IOLs) (e.g., pseudophakic IOLs, aphikic IOLs, or phakic IOLs (PIOLS)), contact lenses, and other lenses that are positionable before eyes of a subject can be used to correct the vision of the subject. For example, contact lenses and IOLs can include monofocal, multifocal, or accommodative configurations.
IOLs can include an optic element (e.g., lens) and haptic elements (e.g., arms or wings configured to aid in positioning the IOL). Such configurations can be limited to focusing either on near or far vision without selectively modifiable adjustment therebetween.
Therefore, manufacturers, users, and designers of IOLs continue to seek improved
IOLs.
SUMMARY
Embodiments disclosed herein are directed to switchable lens devices and systems, such as IOL devices and IOL systems, and methods that include determining relative tilt or vergence of a subject's eyes and focusing one or more or otherwise controlling the switching of the switchable lenses. In an embodiment, the switchable lens device can include one or more sensors configured to detect movement of at least one eye of the subject (e.g., to determine at least one of position, velocity, or acceleration of at least on eye of the subject). For example, the switchable lens device can include one or more acceleration sensors that can be operably coupled to or associated with a first eye or a second eye of the subject. In an embodiment, a first acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the first eye, and a second acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the second eye of the subject.
Embodiments include a lens system that includes a first acceleration sensor operably coupleable to a first eye of a subject and a second acceleration sensor operably coupleable to a second eye of the subject. The lens system also in the first eye of the subject. The at least one switchable lens device includes at least one switchable lens configured to selectively switch between a first focal length and at least a second focal length that is less than the first focal length includes at least one switchable lens device sized and configured to be placed. For example, as described below, the switchable lenses can have multiple optical settings and can be switched from one optical setting to another (e.g., responsive to one or more switching signals. The lens system also includes a controller operably coupled to the first acceleration sensor and to the second acceleration sensor and operably coupled to the at least one switchable lens device. The controller includes control electrical circuitry configured to receive one or more first signals from the first acceleration sensor, receive one or more second signals from the second acceleration sensor, and generate the one or more switching signals for switching the at least one switchable lens from the first focal length to the second focal length or from the second focal length to the first focal length responsive at least partially to the one or more received first signals from the first acceleration sensor and from the second acceleration sensor. In an embodiment, the controller can receive one or more inputs from a user and can switch or direct switching of one or more switchable lenses. For example, the controller can automatically (e.g., without a command from the user or responsive to a signal from one or more sensors detecting a non-command input, event, or condition) switch the switchable lens from a first optical setting to a second optical setting, and can switch back to the first optical setting, from the second optical setting, responsive to an override command or input received from the user (e.g., from the subject wearing the switchable lens).
Embodiment also includes a method of adjusting a focal length. An embodiment includes a lens system that includes at least one switchable lens device including at least one switchable lens configured to selectively switch between a first optical setting and at least a second optical setting, and one or more sensors configured to detect at least one focus-related characteristic of one or more of a first eye or a second eye of the subject or at least one focus-related characteristic of an environment proximate to the subject. The lens system also includes a controller operably coupled to the one or more sensors and operably coupled to the at least one switchable lens device. The controller includes control electrical circuitry that is configured to receive one or more sensor signals from the one or more sensors, and direct sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more received sensor signals. Moreover, the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to receive one or more inputs from the subject and, after directing sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the second optical setting, direct override switching of the at least one switchable lens from the at least a second optical setting to the first optical setting at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject.
An embodiment includes a lens system that includes at least one switchable lens device including at least one switchable lens configured to selectively switch between a first optical setting and at least a second optical setting, and one or more sensors configured to detect at least one focus-related characteristic of one or more of the first eye or the second eye of the subject or of an environment proximate to the subject. The lens system also includes a controller operably coupled to the one or more sensors and operably coupled to the at least one switchable lens device. The controller includes control electrical circuitry that is configured to receive one or more sensor signals from the one or more sensors and direct sensor-based switching an optical setting of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting or from the second optical setting to the first optical setting responsive to the one or more sensor signals, when a state setting is set to an enabled state, and to maintain the optical setting unchanged, when the state setting is set to a disabled state. Moreover, the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to receive one or more inputs from the subject and, after sensor-based switching the optical setting of the at least one switchable lens, at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject, change the state setting between a disabled state and an enabled state.
An embodiment includes a method of changing an optical setting of one or more switchable lens devices. The method includes, at a controller, receiving one or more sensor signals from a first acceleration sensor operably coupleable to a first eye of a subject. The method also includes, at the controller, receiving one or more sensors. The one or more sensor signals from a second acceleration sensor operably coupleable to a second eye of a subject. Moreover, the method includes generating one or more switching signals for switching one or more switchable lenses from a first focal length to a second focal length or from the second focal length to the first focal length responsive at least partially to the one or more first signals from the first acceleration sensor and from the second acceleration sensor. The one or more switching signals correspond to a vergence between the eyes, or are otherwise related to a change in vergence between a first eye and a second eye of the subject. The method also includes directing sensor-based switching of at least one switchable lens from a first optical setting to at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more received sensor signals. Moreover, the method includes after sensor-based switching the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting, receiving one or more inputs from the subject and, at a controller, directing override switching of the at least one switchable lens from the second optical setting to the first optical setting at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject.
An embodiment includes a method of changing an optical setting of one or more switchable lens devices. The method includes, at a controller, receiving one or more sensor signals from one or more sensors. The one or more sensor signals are related to a change in vergence between a first eye and a second eye of the subject. The method also includes receiving one or more inputs from the subject and changing a state setting from a disabled state to an enabled state or from an enabled state to a disabled state at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject. Moreover, the method includes, after changing the states from the disabled state to the enabled state responsive to the one or more user inputs, directing switching an optical setting of at least one switchable lens from a first optical setting to a second optical setting or from the second optical setting to the first optical setting responsive to the one or more sensor signals, when the state setting is set to the enabled state, and to maintaining the optical setting unchanged, when the state setting is set to the disabled state.
An embodiment includes a lens system that includes at least one switchable lens device including at least one switchable lens configured to selectively switch between a first optical setting and at least a second optical setting, and one or more sensors configured to detect at least one focus-related characteristic of one or more of a first eye or a second eye of the subject or at least one focus-related characteristic of an environment proximate to the subject. The lens system also includes a controller operably coupled to the one or more sensors and operably coupled to the at least one switchable lens device. The controller includes control electrical circuitry that is configured to receive one or more sensor signals from the one or more sensors, and direct sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more received sensor signals and based on a first algorithm. The control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to receive one or more inputs from the subject. The control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to, after receiving the one or more inputs from the subject, stop directing sensor-based switching or direct sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more received sensor signals and based on a second algorithm that is different from the first algorithm.
Features from any of the disclosed embodiments can be used in combination with one another, without limitation. In addition, other features and advantages of the present disclosure will become apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art through consideration of the following detailed description and the accompanying drawings.
The foregoing summary is illustrative only and is not intended to be in any way limiting. In addition to the illustrative aspects, embodiments, and features described above, further aspects, embodiments, and features will become apparent by reference to the drawings and the following detailed description.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES FIG. 1 is a schematic top view of a subject's eyes having a first vergence therebetween and focused on a first object at a first distance from the subject, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a schematic top view of the subject's eyes of FIG. 1, with the eyes having a second vergence therebetween and are focused on a second object at a second distance from the subject that is less than the first distance, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 3 is a schematic side, cross- sectional view of a subject's eye and a switchable lens device located in the eye, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 4A is a top view of a switchable lens device, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 4B is a side view of the switchable lens device of FIG. 4A.
FIG. 5A is a schematic top view of a switchable lens system that includes two switchable lens devices oriented by the subject's eyes at a first vergence therebetween, according to an embodiment. FIG. 5B is a schematic top view of the switchable lens system of FIG. 5A in which the switchable lens devices are oriented by the subject's eyes at a second vergence therebetween, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 6A is a schematic front view of a switchable lens system that includes two switchable lens devices oriented by the subject's eyes at a first vergence therebetween, according to yet another embodiment.
FIG. 6B is a schematic front view of the switchable lens system of FIG. 7A in which the switchable lens devices are oriented by the subject's eyes at a second vergence therebetween.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a switchable lens system, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 8A is a schematic top view of a switchable lens device located in the eye, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 8B is a schematic side view of the switchable lens device of FIG. 3A.
FIG. 9 is a schematic front view of a switchable lens system worn by a subject, according to an embodiment.
FIG.10 is a schematic top view of a switchable lens system, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 11A is a schematic front view of a switchable lens system worn by a subject, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 1 IB is a schematic top view of the switchable lens system of FIG. 6A.
FIG. 12 is a schematic front view of a switchable lens system worn by a subject, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 13 is a schematic side view of a switchable lens system worn by a subject, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 14 is a schematic side view of the switchable lens system, according to an embodiment.
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a switchable lens system, according to an embodiment. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Embodiments disclosed herein are directed to switchable lens devices such as IOL devices and systems, and methods that include determining relative tilt or vergence of a subject's eyes and focusing one or more lenses based on the determined vergence or a change therein. In the following detailed description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings, which form a part hereof. In the drawings, similar symbols typically identify similar components, unless context dictates otherwise. The illustrative embodiments described in the detailed description, drawings, and claims are not meant to be limiting. Other embodiments can be utilized, and other changes can be made, without departing from the spirit or scope of the subject matter presented here.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device can include one or more sensors configured to detect movement of at least one eye of the subject (e.g., to determine a least one of position, velocity, or acceleration of at least on eye of the subject). For example, the switchable lens device can include one or more acceleration sensors that can be operably coupled to or associated with a first eye or a second eye of the subject. In an embodiment, a first acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the first eye, and a second acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the second eye of the subject.
For example, the first and second acceleration sensors can move together with the corresponding first and second eyes of the subject, and can generate one or more signals that can correspond to the movement of the first and second eyes. Generally, the first and second acceleration sensors can include any suitable sensor capable of sensing or detecting acceleration. For example, acceleration sensors can include one or more of a MEMS accelerometer, a gyroscope, combinations or arrays thereof, etc. In an embodiment, the first acceleration sensor or the second acceleration sensor can be associated with or mechanically coupled to the switchable lens device. For example, the first acceleration sensor can be mechanically coupled to a first switchable lens of the switchable lens device, and the second acceleration sensor can be mechanically coupled to a second switchable lens of the switchable lens device.
In one or more embodiments, the switchable lens system can include at least one switchable lens device (e.g., an IOL device, a contact lens, etc.) that can be positioned in an eye of a subject. The acceleration sensor can be operably connected to the eye of the subject, such as to detect motion of the eye responsive to a vergence of the subject's eyes. Moreover, the acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to a controller that can direct the switchable lens to change an optical setting (e.g., a focal length) responsive to the output of the acceleration sensor, which is related to the vergence rotation. For example, as the eyes of the subject tilt or pivot, the accelerometer can detect a change in the velocity of the first eye or of the second eye (e.g., an acceleration of the first or second eye), and the detected changes in the velocity can be related to a vergence between the eyes of the subject.
In an embodiment, acceleration sensor can include a plurality of accelerometers that can be positioned in or operably coupled to the first eye or the second eye. For example, the plurality of accelerometers (e.g., an array of accelerometers) can determine acceleration of the first eye along multiple directions. Additionally, the plurality of accelerometers can determine acceleration of the second eye along multiple directions. In an embodiment, the controller can receive signals from the plurality of accelerometers and can determine angular acceleration or angular velocity of the first eye or of the second eye.
In an embodiment, the controller can compare signals received from the accelerometer sensor(s) to distinguish the vergence rotation from tilt rotation of the subject's eyes. For example, acceleration signals having a short duration and representative of higher acceleration of the eyes (e.g., compared to a selected or determined duration or acceleration values) can be associated with the change in vergence. Moreover, in an embodiment, the controller can determine a new focal length (e.g., a focal length to which to switch the switchable lens) responsive to the direction or the angular velocity or acceleration, as determined by the accelerometer(s). Hence, for example, the controller can generate one or more switching signals responsive at least in part to one or more signals received from the accelerometer(s).
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device can include one or more additional sensors (e.g., in addition to the acceleration sensors). For example, the switchable lens device can include one or more energy field sensors (e.g., magnetic or electric field sensors) and one or more field sources that can establish an identifiable field that can be sensed or detected by the field sensors. For example, the field can be an identifiable magnetic field established by a permanent or electromagnet. Furthermore, as discussed below in more detail, the field source (e.g., a magnetic field source) can be positioned in at least one eye of the subject. For example, the field source can be embedded in or mounted to a switchable lens device (e.g., IOL device, contact lens, etc.), that can be located in one of the subject's eye. Alternatively or additionally, the field source can be positioned near, but externally to one or both of the subject' s eyes. In an embodiment, one or more sensors positioned in one or both eyes of the subject can detect a change in the identifiable field, or in a component thereof, during vergence rotation (e.g., as the vergence between the eyes changes), such as when the eyes converge or diverge. Hence, for example, the detected change in an identifiable magnetic field or a component thereof can correspond to a change in the vergence between the eyes.
As mentioned above, the switchable device system can include a controller. For example, the controller can be operably coupled to the field sensor and can receive detection output from the sensor. More specifically, the detection outputs from the sensor can be based on the detected change in the field or based on the one or more components thereof, which can be related to vergence rotation between the eyes of the subject. In an embodiment, the control can distinguish between vergence rotation of the eyes and co-tilt rotation of the eyes (e.g., when the eyes of the subject tilt in the same direction, such as to view an object located peripherally or to a side of the subject). As a consequence of such distinguishing, in such embodiments, each switchable lens can act independently of the other, reaching an accurate vergence determination (and hence an accurate focal length determination) on its own, without a need for communication between both of the switchable lenses so as to compare each switchable lens determined tilt with that of the other switchable lens in order to decide which portion of each switchable lens's tilt represents vergence and which represents co-tilt.
As discussed above, the switchable lens can be switchable between two or more focal lengths (e.g., a first focal length for distance vision and a second focal length for close-up vision). Moreover, the switchable lens device can include a single or multiple switchable lenses that can be directed or switched between two or more focal lengths by the controller. Moreover, the controller can be operably connected to the sensor(s) and can receive outputs therefrom, which can be related to the detected change in the field and, hence, to vergence rotation between the eyes. In an embodiment, the controller can switch or direct switching of the switchable lenses at least partially based on the outputs received from the sensor(s) or the one or more signals received from the accelerometer.
In an embodiment, the controller can compare the determination of change in vergence between the first eye and the second eye (e.g., whether the tilt of the first and second eye corresponds to a change in vergence), which is determined responsive to the one or more signals received from the accelerometer(s), to the determination of change in vergence, which is determined responsive to the one or more signals received from the sensors. For example, when the signals received from the accelerometer(s) and from the sensors indicate that the tilt of the subject' s eyes corresponds to a change in vergence, the controller can determine that the eyes converged or diverged (e.g., based on the direction of movement of the eyes) or can generate a switching signal for switching the switchable lens from one focal length to another).
In an embodiment, the switchable lens systems disclosed herein can include one or more sensors configured to detect one or more physiological indicia of the subject. For example, the switchable lens system can include one or more sensors configured to detect glucose concentration (e.g., in the eye of the subject), eye pressure, heart rate, biological proteins present in the eye, or any other biological indicia. The one or more sensors can be operably coupled to the controller. The controller of the switchable lens system can be configured to transmit the measurements of the physical indicia to a remote source such as a computer, a cellular phone, or other electronic device. In an embodiment, the measured physical indicia may be used to determine the health of a subject or eye thereof, customize the operation of the switchable lens device to the particular subject, determine if the controller needs to be removed or adjusted, or determine if the focal adjustments of the controller are suitable for the subject. The electronic device may then transmit instructions to the controller to selectively control or otherwise adjust the functioning of the switchable lens system, such as controllably changing the focal length of the switchable lens device.
FIG. 1 schematically illustrates eyes 20 and 30 of a subject focused on a first object 10 that is positioned at a first distance from the subject. In particular, when the eyes 20, 30 are focused on the first object 10, an angle between respective optical axes thereof can be at a vergence angle φι. FIG. 1 also schematically illustrates a switchable lens system 100, according to an embodiment. For example, the switchable lens system 100 can include a first switchable lens device 1 10 positioned in a first eye 20 and a second switchable lens device 110' positioned in a second eye 30 of the subject. In the illustrated embodiment, the switchable lenses 1 10, 1 10' can be intraocular switchable lenses. Additionally or alternatively, the switchable lenses 1 10, 1 10' can be lenses that can be positionable externally to the subject's first and second eyes 20, 30 (e.g., contact lenses).
Generally, the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10' can be configured to augment or correct visual deficiencies of the subject or to replace the lenses in the respective first eye 20 or second eye 30 of the subject (e.g., in cataract surgeries). It should be appreciated that, in one or more embodiments, the switchable lens system 100 can include only a single switchable lens (e.g., the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10'), which can be positioned in the first eye 20 or in the second eye 30. The switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to or set at a first focal length, such that the light entering the eye from the distance of the first object 10 is focused on the retina of the respective eyes 20, 30, thereby focusing the eyes 20, 30 on the first object 10.
When the subject focuses on another object, such as an object that is closer to the subject than the first object 10, the object's eyes 20, 30 can tilt such as to converge, thereby changing the angle between the optical axes thereof. FIG. 2 schematically shows the subject's eyes 20, 30 focused on a second object 40, which is positioned at a second distance and closer to the subject than the first object 10 (FIG. 1). For example, when the eyes 20, 30 focus on the second object 40, the angle between the optical axis thereof can change to a second angle φ2. More specifically, as the eyes 20, 30 focus on the closer, second object 40, the eyes 20, 30 converge or in-tilt, such that the second angle φ2 defined by the respective optical axis thereof is greater than the first angle φι.
In an embodiment, responsive to the changed tilt between the eyes 20, 30, the switchable lens devices 110 or 1 10' can be switched to the second focal length, which can be shorter than the first focal length. The switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can include one or more sensors that can sense or detect a change in an identifiable field (e.g., magnetic field) and can correlate that change to the change vergence rotation between the eyes 20, 30 (e.g., convergence to focus on a closer object or divergence to focus on a farther object). Similarly, as the subject attempts to focus eyes 20, 30 on an object at a distance that is greater than the distance to the second object 40 (e.g., on the first object 10 (FIG. 1)), the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to the first focal length (longer than the second focal length).
Moreover, as described below in more detail, the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can distinguish between vergence rotation from co-tilt rotation (e.g., when the eyes 20, 30 rotate in the same direction, such as to observe an object located peripherally from the user). As such, for example, the switchable lens device 1 10 or 1 10' can switch focal length responsive to detected vergence rotation. In an embodiment, the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can maintain a previously set focal length during co-tilt of the eyes 20, 30.
As mentioned above, the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be located in the subject's eyes (e.g., in the eye 20 or in the eye 30). FIG. 3 is a schematic side, cross- sectional view of the eye 20 with the switchable lens device 1 10 implanted therein (e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device), according to an embodiment. It should be appreciated that, while the description herein is related to the switchable lens device 1 10 and to the corresponding eye 20 of the subject, the switchable lens device 1 10' or its location in the eye 30 (FIGS. 1-2) can have the same or similar configuration. Generally, the eye 20 includes a cornea 21, an iris 22, a natural lens, and a retina 23 therebehind. One or more switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted in the eye 20. For example, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted over the natural lens, in front of (e.g., in the anterior chamber) or behind the iris 22 (e.g., in the posterior chamber), or internal to the natural lens such as in a capsular bag 24 of the natural lens. In an embodiment, the natural lens can be absent from the eye 20 (e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 can replace the natural lens and can be placed in the anterior chamber, the posterior chamber, or internal to the capsular bag that is used to contain the natural lens).
Generally, the switchable lens 1 10 can be any suitable lens that is configured to switch between at least two different optical settings (e.g., between two different focal lengths) responsive to one or more electrical inputs. Hence, for example, a controller can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 10 among two or more optical settings. In an embodiment, the switchable lens 1 10 can be an electrically-modifiable diffractive lens, as described in more detail in U. S. Application No. 14/807,673, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference. Additionally or alternatively, the switchable lens 1 10 can be liquid crystal lens (e.g., a liquid crystal lens with an electrically tunable focal length).
Generally, as described below in more detail, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a lens 1 1 1 and haptics 1 12 connected to or integrated with the lens 1 1 1. In an embodiment, the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on or secured to one or more structures in the eye 20, thereby positioning or securing the switchable lens device 1 10 in the eye 20. For example, the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on the ciliary body or muscles or in or on the capsular bag 24 of the natural lens. The lens 1 1 1 can be located laterally in the center of the eye 20 with the haptics 1 12 extending laterally therefrom. As mentioned above, the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10 can be switched between two or more focal lengths, to focus light entering the eye from a selected distance on the retina 23 of the eye 20, thereby providing a focus on an object located at the selected focal length and augmenting or correcting the vision of the subject. Again, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include lenses that can be at least partially positionable externally to the subject' s eyes, such as contact lenses. For example, the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be included in or can comprise a contact lens, the can be positionable near the subject' s eye.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be substantially fixed within the eye 20 (e.g., the IOL device can be substantially immobile relative to the optical axis of the eye 20). As such, for example, movement of the eye 20 can result in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10. In particular, as the eye 20 tilts or pivots in the eye socket, the switchable lens device 1 10 can correspondingly tilt or pivot together with the eye 20. Furthermore, one, some, or all of the elements or components of the switchable lens device 1 10 can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye 20 or relative to the optical axis thereof, as described below in more detail.
FIGS 4A and 4B illustrate switchable lens device 1 10, according to an embodiment. FIG. 4A is a top view of the switchable lens device 1 10, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the switchable lens device 1 10. The switchable lens device 1 10 can be configured to fit in or on one or more anatomical structures of the eye and can include the lens 1 1 1 and one or more haptics 1 12. As described above, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device, a contact lens device, etc. For example, as will be apparent from the disclosure herein, a contact lens can be configured without the haptics 1 12. As shown in FIG. 4A, in an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 includes the lens 1 1 1. For example, the lens 1 1 1 can be configured to focus light onto the surface of the retina and can be substantially circular or elliptical. Furthermore, the lens 1 1 1 can be switchable between two or more optical settings, such as between two or more focal lengths (e.g., between three or more focal lengths). In an embodiment, the lens 1 1 1 can include or can be configured as a switchable diffractive lens. Additionally or alternatively, the lens 1 1 1 can include or can be configured as a refractive lens that can have a selectively modifiable index of refraction and focal length (e.g., a variable focus refractive lens). In any embodiment, the lens 1 11 can be switched at least between the first focal length and at least a second focal length.
In an embodiment, a controller 130 can include control electrical circuitry that can be operably coupled to the lens 1 1 1 and can switch or direct switching of the lens 1 1 1 between two or more optical settings, such as between two or more focal lengths. For example, the control electrical circuitry of the controller can generate a switching signal and, responsive at least partially to the switching signal, the lens 1 1 1 can switch from a first optical setting, such as a first focal length, to a second optical setting, such as a second optical length. In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, a controller 130 can be mounted on or embedded in the haptics 1 12, in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 110, or in another suitable portion of the switchable lens device 1 10.
Moreover, the controller 130 can receive a detection output from one or more sensors, such as from an acceleration sensor, field sensor, physiological characteristic sensor, etc. The detection output(s) from the sensor(s) can be related or correspond to the vergence rotation between the subject's eyes. At least partially based on the received detection output, the controller 130 can switch the lens 1 1 1 to a suitable or predetermined focal length. For example, the controller 130 can be operably coupled to and can receive a detection outputs from a field sensor 140 or from an acceleration sensor 145. It should be appreciated that the field sensor 140 can include a single or multiple sensors that can detect presence or changes in a magnetic field. The acceleration sensor 145 can also include a single accelerometer, gyroscope, etc., or multiple accelerometers, gyroscopes, etc., (e.g., two or more of which can be arranged in an array). As described above, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the physiological characteristic sensor, etc., can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, the field sensor 140 or the acceleration sensor 145 can be mounted on or embedded in the haptics 1 12 or in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10. Generally, the field sensor 140 can be any suitable sensor, such as sensor(s) suitable for detecting changes in the identifiable magnetic or electric field, which can correspond to vergence rotation of the eyes, as described below in more detail. As mentioned above, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include acceleration sensor 145, which can include any number of suitable sensors for detecting acceleration (or change in velocity or acceleration) of the subject' s first or second eye.
Moreover, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, or any additional sensors, such as physiological characteristics sensor, can be embedded in or mounted on the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., MEMS-based sensors that can be embedded in or mounted on one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10). Examples of suitable field sensors include Hall effect sensors, magnetoresi stance sensors (e.g., AMR magnetometer, GMR magnetometer), induction coils, magneto-diodes, Lorentz force based sensors, an electron tunneling based sensor, or a MEMS compass. For example, the field sensor 140 can generate one or more detection outputs (e.g., a measurable change in voltage or resonant frequency) that can be related to or based on the changes in the position of an identifiable magnetic field, which can be related to the change in vergence between the subject's eyes. In an embodiment, the field sensor 140 can generate a signal that can include detection output of the field sensor 140. Examples of suitable acceleration sensors include MEMS-based accelerometers, MEMS-based gyroscopes (e.g., vibrating structure gyroscope), etc. For example, as described above, one or more signals received from the acceleration sensor 145 can be related to motion of the first or second eye of the subject and change in vergence therebetween. The acceleration sensor 145 can be operably coupled or connected to the controller
130. As described above, the acceleration sensor 145 can be mechanically coupled to the switchable lens device 1 10 that can be operably connected or secured to the right or left eye of the subject. Hence, for example, the acceleration sensor 145 can generate one or more signals responsive to movement of the eye (e.g., responsive to the movement of the eye to which the switchable lens device 1 10 is connected), as the acceleration sensor 145 moves together with the eye.
In an embodiment, as the subject moves the eye together with the switchable lens device 1 10, the acceleration sensor 145 can generate one or more signals responsive to the motion of the eye, and the controller 130 can receive the signal(s) from the acceleration sensor 145. In particular, for example, responsive to the signal(s) received from the acceleration sensor 145, the controller 130 can determine acceleration of the eye (e.g., the rate of change of the eye' s velocity and direction thereof), velocity of the eye (e.g., the rate of movement of the eye and movement direction). In an embodiment, the controller 130 can determine angular acceleration or velocity of the eye, at least partially responsive to the signal(s) received from the acceleration sensor 145 (e.g., at least partially based on the signals received from multiple accelerometers that can comprise the acceleration sensor 145, the controller 130 can determine the direction and magnitude of angular acceleration and velocity of the subject's eye).
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can optionally include a field source 150 (e.g., a magnetic field source), which can establish an identifiable magnetic field that can be detectable by an additional sensor that can be operably coupled to an additional controller. The field source 150 can be a dipole magnet (e.g., a permanent magnet, an electromagnet, combination of the foregoing, etc.) and can establish or generate a corresponding identifiable dipole magnetic field. Furthermore, the field source 150 can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, the field source 150 can be embedded in the haptics 112 (as shown in FIG. 4B) or in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
In an embodiment, the field source 150 can be generally fixed in or stationary relative to the eye. Additionally or alternatively, the field source 150 can have a predetermine orientation relative to the eye or to the optical axis thereof. For example, the field source can be embedded within the switchable lens device 1 10 at a first predetermined orientation relative to the switchable lens device 1 10, and the switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted within the eye at a second predetermined orientation relative to the eye. As such, for example, the identifiable field, such as an identifiable magnetic field can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye or relative to the optical axis thereof. Moreover, in an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be positioned in the eye in a manner that movement of the eye results in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10. Hence, for example, movement of the eye can produce a corresponding movement of the field source 150 and of the magnetic field established thereby. As such, a sensor detects the change in the established identifiable magnetic field, which can correspond to the movement of the identifiable magnetic field and of the eye (e.g., the movement of the eye can be tilting or pivoting of the eye that at least partially corresponds to a vergence rotation between the eyes). Methods, devices, and systems suitable for establishing one or more identifiable energy fields, measuring the energy fields, and determining change in the vergence rotation between the eyes based at least in part on the measurements are more fully described in U. S. Patent Application No. 14/807,719, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference. The switchable lens device(s) can be located in one or in both eyes of the subject.
In an embodiment, a switchable lens device in the first eye can communicate with another switchable lens in the second eye, and vice versa (e.g., the switchable lens devices can be operably coupled together). For example, the switchable lens device in the second eye can send to the switchable lens device 1 10 in the first eye the detection output received from a first sensor in the switchable lens in the second eye, can send focal length determination, etc. In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a communication device 160 (e.g., the controller 130 can be operably coupled to the communication device 160). The communication device 160 can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, the communication device 160 can be embedded in the haptics 1 12 (as shown in FIG. 4B) or in the lens 11 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
The communication device 160 can be wireless (e.g., the communication device 160 can be a transmitter or a transceiver) or wired. For example, a wireless (e.g., RF- based or US-based) connection can be established between the communication device 160 and another or additional communication device. Alternatively, the communication device 160 and another communication device can have a wired connection therebetween. For example, an electrical conductor connecting the communication device 160 and another communication device can be implanted in or near the eyes of the subject. In any embodiment, the communication device 160 can be operably coupled to the additional communication device, such as to send data therebetween. In an embodiment, one or more of the controller 130, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, or communication device 160 can be operably coupled or connected to a power source. For example, the power source can include a rechargeable energy storage device or battery (not shown) that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. The battery can be wirelessly recharged (e.g., a wireless or inductive charger can recharge the battery). In an embodiment, the battery can be operably connected to a photovoltaic cell that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. Alternatively or additionally, the battery can be operably connected or coupled to a charge port that can be configured to accept a charging device. In any event, the power source can power one or more of the controller 130, field sensor 140, field source 150, or communication device 160.
In an embodiment, the power source may include a parasitic power device, such as an induction coil, one or more photocells, thermoelectric device, or any other device configured to harvest energy from a subject or the environment. For example, the induction coil can include a channel having a magnet therein, the channel passing the induction coil upon movement of the subject (e.g., eye-movement or blinking). In an embodiment, an induction coil can be disposed in the eye of a subject (e.g., in or adjacent to the switchable lens) and a corresponding magnet may be positioned on an adjacent part of the subject (e.g., an eyelid or bridge of the nose) whereby movement of the eye or eyelid can cause a current in the induction coil.
Again, while the switchable lens device 1 10 is described as including the controller 130, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, and communication device 160, configurations of the switchable lens device 1 10 can vary from one embodiment to the next. In particular, for example, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include only the controller 130 and the acceleration sensor 145 that can detect a change in the position, velocity, or acceleration of the subject's first or second eye). Also, one of the switchable lens device (e.g., of a switchable lens system) can include only the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, and the controller 130, which the other switchable lens device can include the field sensor 140 that can be operably coupled to the controller 130.
As described above, the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device or multiple switchable lens devices (e.g., a switchable lens device can be located in one or in both eyes of the subject). Generally, the switchable lens devices of the switchable lens system can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10. It should be appreciated, however, that any of the switchable lens devices included in the switchable lens systems described herein can include or can be operably coupled to any number of controllers, sensors, field sources, communication devices, or combinations thereof, which can be similar to or the same as the controller 130, field sensor 140, acceleration sensor 145, field source 150, and communication device 160. It should be appreciated that the field source 150 or the field sensor 140 are optional for the switchable lens device 1 10 or for operation thereof or of the controller 130.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device 1 10 or can include multiple switchable lens devices that can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., the switchable lens system 100 (FIGS. 1-2)). FIGS. 5A-5B schematically illustrate a switchable lens system 100a that includes a first switchable lens device 1 10a in the first or right eye (not shown), and a second switchable lens device 1 10b in the second or left eye (not shown), according to an embodiment. It should be appreciated that designations, first eye/right eye and second eye/left eye are used for ease of description only and should not be read as limiting (e.g., the first switchable lens device 1 10a can be positioned in the second or left eye and the second switchable lens device 1 10b can be positioned in the first or right eye). Except as otherwise described herein, any of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, second switchable lens device 1 10b, and their elements and components can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens devices 1 10, 1 10' (FIGS. 1-4B) and their corresponding elements and components.
FIG. 5A illustrates the first switchable lens device 1 10a and the second switchable lens device 1 10b, with respective first and second optical axes 60a and 60b of the first and second eyes oriented to define a first angle φ1 therebetween, at which the eyes are focused on first object at first distance from the subject. FIG. 5B shows the first and second eye focused on a second obj ect that is closer than the first object, and the first and second optical axes 60a, 60b define a second angle φ2 that is smaller than the first angle φι.
In an embodiment, the first switchable lens device 1 10a includes a first field sensor 140a and a first acceleration sensor 145a operably coupled to a controller 130a including control electrical circuitry (e.g., the first field sensor 140a, first acceleration sensor 145a, or controller 130a can be embedded in one or more portions of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, such as in the haptics 1 12a of the first switchable lens device 1 10a). Moreover, the controller 130a can be operably coupled to first lens 1 1 la of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, such as to switch or direct switching of the focal length of the first lens 1 1 la at least between two different focal lengths.
As described above, the first switchable lens device 1 10a can include a first acceleration sensor 145a, and the second switchable lens device 1 10b can include a second acceleration sensor 145b. Moreover, the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b can be operably associated with the respective first and second eyes of the subject, such that movement of the first eye correspondingly moves the first switchable lens device 1 10a, and movement of the second eye moves the second switchable lens device 1 10b. Hence, as the subject moves or tilts the eyes toward or away from each other, to change the vergence therebetween, the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b of the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b can detect the movement of the eyes.
Moreover, the one or more signals received by the controller 130 from one or more acceleration sensors (e.g., from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b) can be related to or indicative of acceleration of the first eye and of the second eye. Hence, the controller 130a can determine the velocity of the first eye by integrating the function of the acceleration (e.g., over time, to determine velocity at a specific time), which can be generated responsive to the one or more signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b. Also, the controller 130 can determine the position or change in position of the first eye and second eye (e.g., by integrating over time the function of velocity).
In an embodiment, as described above, the controller 130a can determine a change in vergence between the eyes based on the determined acceleration, velocity, or position (or change in position) of each of the eyes. Additionally, the controller 130a can distinguish the change in vergence between the first eye and second eye and tilt of the first eye or the second eye. For example, when tilted, the optical axes 60a, 60b of the first and second eyes can be oriented substantially parallel to each other, while when focused on an object in front of the subject, the optical axes 60a, 60b can be oriented at non parallel angles (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 5A-5B), where the first and second angles φι, φ2 are non- zero angles. Hence, for example, the controller 130a can determine the first and second angles φι, φ2 based on the change in one or more of the acceleration, velocity, or angular position or orientation of the first and second eyes. Moreover, the controller 130a can determine the first and second angles φι, φ2 based on the change the field or one or more of the components thereof, as detected by the field sensor 140a or 140b. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can determine one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye based on the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor 145a and one or more second signals received from the second acceleration sensor 145b. For example, the controller 130a can include or can be operably connected to a data table that can correlate one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye with the vergence between the eyes. For example, the subject can train the controller 130a or generate the table responsive to prompts from the controller 130a.
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, determine one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye, and prompt user for input identifying the vergence or tilt of the eyes; the input can be stored in the table and correlated with the signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b. Additionally or alternatively, the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, determine one or more of a change difference in angular position, a change difference in angular velocity, or a change difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye, and prompt user for input identifying the vergence or tilt of the eyes; the input can be stored in the table and correlated with the change in signals received from the first and second accelerometers 145a, 145b or with the changes in the acceleration, velocity, or position.
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b and can generate one or more switching signals for switching the lenses 1 1 la or 1 1 lb from a first optical setting to a second optical setting. For example, the lens 1 1 1a or lens 1 1 1b can have a first focal length at the first optical setting and a second focal length at the second optical setting.
In an embodiment, multiple switchable lenses can be switched or controlled by a single controller, such as the controller 130a. Additionally or alternatively, each of the multiple lenses can include a controller and the respective controllers can be operably coupled to each other (e.g., via hardwired connection, wireless connection, etc.), such that a first controller receives one or more signals from a second controller and vice versa. For example, first controller can receive signals from second controller; the signals can be related to the acceleration or velocity of the second eye (e.g., based on the one or more signals received at the second controller from the acceleration sensor). Moreover, multiple controllers, each of which can include a respective electrical circuitry, can operate collectively as a single controller that can generate one or more switching signals for a first lens in the first eye of the subject or for the second lens in the second eye of the subject.
It should be appreciated that the controller 130a or one or more portions thereof can be located at any number of suitable locations (e.g., relative to the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can be located remotely from the at least one or from both of the first and second switchable lenses 1 1 1a, 1 1 1b. For example, a portion of the controller 130a can be located or included in a personal electronic device (e.g., a smart phone or the like).
Generally, the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b can be operably coupled to the controller 130a with any number of suitable connections. For example, the acceleration sensor 145a or 145b can be operably coupled to the controller 130a via at least one of a radio frequency connection, an optical transmission connection, an ultrasonic connection, or an electrical-conductor connection. Additionally or alternatively, the first or second acceleration sensor 145a, 145b can be coupled to the controller 130a by a hardwired connection.
As described above, the controller 130 can generate one or more switching signals to switch or direct switching of the lens 1 1 1 from a first optical setting to a second optical setting, or vice versa. In an embodiment, the controller 130 can generate the one or more switching signals responsive to the one or more signals received from first acceleration sensor 145a that detected motion of the first eye or from the one or more signals received from second acceleration sensor 145b that detected motion of the second eye. That is, for example, the controller 130 can generate the one or more switching signals responsive to the detected change in vergence between the first eye and second eye, and detection of the change in vergence between the eyes can be based on determined acceleration or velocity of the eyes (e.g., angular acceleration or velocity determined by the controller 130 based on one or more signals received from the acceleration sensor(s)). In an embodiment, at least one acceleration sensor can be located outside of the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b. For example, at least one acceleration sensor can be positioned remotely from the subject's first and second eyes. At least one acceleration sensor that is positioned externally to the first and second eyes of the subject can be operably coupled to the controller 130a; hence, in an embodiment, one or more signals received by the controller 130a from such sensor(s) can be associated with the general movement of the subject and not with the movement of the subject' s first or second eye (e.g., can be associated with movement of the subject's body or head).
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can compare the signals or acceleration determined from the remote acceleration sensor(s), which are positioned remotely of the subject's eyes, to the signals or acceleration determined from the first or second accelerations sensor 145a, 145b. For example, the controller 130a can filter out at least some of the noise that may be present in the signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b (e.g., the controller 130a can subtract the acceleration determined from the remote acceleration sensors from the acceleration determined from one or more of the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b). In an embodiment, the controller 130a can filter out one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, such as signals that may correspond to general vibration of one or more portions of the sensors (e.g., noise from vibration of the mass of a MEMS sensor that may occur without movement of the subject or subject' s eyes) and can filter out signals resulting from movement of the subject (e.g., walking, driving, etc.).
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can include or can be operably connected to a storage that includes or stores signal samples corresponding to signal noise. For example, the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b while the subject is not moving the eye and standing still, while the subject is walking, while the subject is driving, etc. (e.g., to identify noise signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b under different conditions when the subject is not moving the eyes). Hence, the controller 130a can filter out or ignore one or more signals or portions of the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, which correspond or similar to the noise signals previously received by the controller 130a (e.g., during calibration of the controller 130a). Moreover, during use of the switchable lens system 100a, the noise characteristics of the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b can change over time. In some embodiments, the controller 130a can be configured to retest or rest the stored noise signals. For example, to calibrate or recalibrate the controller 130a or the first or second acceleration sensor 145a, 145b, the subject can periodically perform various activities without moving eyes and provide feedback or input to the controller 130a that can correlate various conditions of the subject, such as walking, sitting, driving, etc., with noise signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can reject or filter out signals related to or indicative of up and down movements of the eyes. For example, based on one or more received signals or inputs (e.g., based on signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b), the controller 130a can determine orientation of the subject's head relative to gravitational vector. Moreover, as described herein, based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, the controller 130a can determine direction of movement of the subject's eyes relative to the head of the subject. For example, the controller 130a can determine movement of the subject's eyes relative to the gravitational vector and correlate the determined movement to the orientation of the subject's head relative to the gravitational vector to determine the movement of the eyes relative to the head. Hence, for example, the controller 130a can filter out signals from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, which correspond to up and down movement of the eyes relative to the subject' s head, such as toward the forehead and toward the nose (e.g., irrespective of the orientation of the subject' s head), or up or down movement of the subject's head.
In some embodiments, the controller 130a can be configured to differentiate at least one noise signal and at least one detection signal by comparing magnitude of a signal to the magnitude of a second signal and by identifying the first signal as the at least one noise signal. For example, both the first and second signals can be received from the same acceleration sensor (e.g., from the first acceleration sensor 145a or from the second sensor 145b). In an embodiment, the controller 130a can filter out signals below a certain magnitude threshold. For example, the controller 130a can determine an average signal level while the subject is not moving the eyes and filter out or subtract signals below the threshold of the average signal level.
As described above, at least one of the switchable lens devices can include an energy field sensor (e.g., a sensor configured to detect a change in a magnetic or electric field). Moreover, in some embodiments, at least one of the switchable lens devices can include a field source that can generate an identifiable energy field (e.g., a magnetic field) that can be detected by the energy field sensor. In the illustrated embodiment, the second switchable lens device 110b can include a magnetic field source 150b mounted thereon or embedded therein.
The magnetic field source 150b can establish an identifiable magnetic field 50b that can be sensed by the first field sensor 140a. More specifically, for example, the first field sensor 140a can detect the change in orientation or location of the identifiable magnetic field 50b. It should be also appreciated that the magnetic field source 50b can be positioned or secured in the subject's second eye without the second switchable lens device 1 10b (e.g., the magnetic field source 50b can be implanted in the eye, such as in the sclera of the eye). In any event, in one or more embodiments, the magnetic field source 150b can move and tilt together with the second eye (correspondingly moving the identifiable magnetic field 50b), and the first field sensor 140a can detect the change in the orientation or location of the identifiable magnetic field 50b. It should be also appreciated that any of the elements or components described herein as included in one or more switchable lens devices can be directly implanted in the eye or secured to the eye, without implanting or otherwise associating a switchable lens device in that eye (e.g., a controller, an acceleration sensor, a field source, a field sensor, etc., can be implanted directly in the eye).
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can be configured to correlate the detected change in the identifiable magnetic field 50b with the vergence rotation between the eyes. For example, the first field sensor 140a can generate a detection output that can correspond to a change at least partially corresponding to the vergence rotation by detecting a changed component of the identifiable magnetic field, which can be in a direction substantially perpendicular to a direction of a dominant component of the identifiable magnetic field. Furthermore, the detection output can be received by the controller 130a, and based on the detection output, the controller 130a can determine the vergence rotation between the eyes.
In an embodiment, at least partially based on or from the determined vergence rotation, the controller 130a can determine an apparent or estimated object distance (e.g., the distance from the subject to the object on which the subject' s eyes are attempting to focus). In an embodiment, at least partially based on the determined distance, the controller 130a can determine the first or second focal length for the switchable lens (e.g., for the switchable lens 1 1 1a or for the switchable lens 1 1 1b) and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens to the determined focal length.
Generally, the magnetic field source 50b can be any suitable magnet, which can establish any suitable magnetic field that can vary from one embodiment to the next. In the illustrated embodiment, the magnetic field source 50b is a dipole magnet, such as a permanent magnet (e.g., a ferromagnet). In an embodiment, the magnetic field source 50b can be a dipole electromagnet. In an embodiment, the magnetic field source 50b can generate a magnetic field having both a dipole and a non-dipole contribution. In such an embodiment, the non-dipole contributions generally weaken more with distance from the magnetic field source 50b than do the dipole contributions so that at a sufficient distance from the magnetic field source 50b (e.g., at the sensor location 140a), the dominant contribution is that of a magnetic dipole. In an embodiment, the electromagnet can be operably coupled to the controller 130a or to an additional controller (e.g., to a controller in the second switchable lens device 1 10b), which can turn on or off the electromagnet or can change an intensity of the magnetic field established or generated thereby. For example, the electromagnet can be pulsed in a manner that can distinguish or identify the magnetic field established thereby from other, interfering magnetic fields that can be present in the subject' s environment. Moreover, based on the detection output from the first field sensor 140a, the controller 130a can distinguish the identifiable pulsed magnetic field from other magnetic fields.
Generally, as mentioned above, the first field sensor 140a can be any suitable sensor or multiple sensors, which can be sufficiently miniaturized for placement in the subject's eye (e.g., MEMS based sensors that can be embedded in or mounted on the first switchable lens device 110a). Examples of suitable sensors include Hall effect sensors, magnetore si stance sensors (e.g., AMR magnetometer, GMR magnetometer), induction coils, magneto-diodes, Lorentz force based sensors, Electron Tunneling based sensor, MEMS compass, etc. In any event, the first field sensor 140a can be or can include any suitable sensor or combination of sensors that can detect the change in the location or orientation of the identifiable magnetic field 50b. In an embodiment, the first switchable lens device 1 10a can be positioned at a predetermined location or orientation relative to the first optical axis 60a of the first eye, and the second switchable lens device 1 10b or the identifiable magnetic field 50b or pole axis of the magnetic field source 150b can be oriented relative to the second optical axis 60b of the second eye at a predetermined pitch angle a. Generally, the predetermined pitch angle can be any suitable angle, which can vary from one embodiment to the next. For example, the pitch angle a can be a non-parallel angle relative to the first or second optical axis 60a, 60b, an obtuse angle, or an acute angle. Moreover, as described below in more detail, the pitch angle can be 0°, such that a magnetic field component of the identifiable magnetic field 50b is substantially parallel to the second optical axis 60b.
Furthermore, the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented such that the first field sensor 140a or the controller 130a can distinguish between in-tilt or convergence of the eyes (e.g., when the subject attempts to change focus on from a first object to a second object that is closer to the subject) from co-tilt of the eyes (e.g., when the subject tilts or pivots eyes to focus on an object located peripherally, such as to the left or to the right of the subject). For example, the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented at about 45° relative to the second optical axis 60b (e.g., within less than 1° of the 45°, within less than 2° of the 45°, within less than 5° of the 45°).
It should be appreciated that the identifiable magnetic field 50b can have any suitable orientation relative to the second optical axis 60b. For example, the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented relative to the second optical axis 60b such that convergence of the eyes results in an increased magnitude or changed direction of the magnetic field vector (e.g., Lorentz force vector), which can be distinguishable from the direction of the magnetic field vector sensed by the first field sensor 140a when the eyes co-tilt, as discussed below in more detail. In other words, the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented such that the detection output received from the first field sensor 140a can be processed by the controller 130a to distinguish or identify the change in magnitude or direction of the Lorentz force vector of the identifiable magnetic field 50b in a manner that the controller 130a can distinguish convergence or in-tilt of the eyes from co-tilt.
It should be also appreciated that the first field sensor 140a of the first switchable lens device 1 10a can be configured to measure the strength and direction of the magnetic field, to measure the component of the magnetic field in a specific sensitivity direction, or to include multiple (collocated or not) magnetic sensors each of which is configured to measure separately directed components of the magnetic field. In an embodiment, the first field sensor 140a includes a sensor configured to measure a magnetic field component oriented at 0° relative to the first optical axis 60a. In an embodiment, the first field sensor 140a includes a sensor configured to measure a magnetic field component oriented at 90° relative to the first optical axis 60a (e.g., in the plane of the first switchable lens device 110a) directed to or away from the second switchable lens device 110b. The first field sensor 140a is mounted or embedded within the first switchable lens device 110a so that as the first eye tilts, changing the direction of first optical axis 60a and first switchable lens device 110a, the sensitivity direction of the first field sensor 140a also changes. Accordingly, the value of a specific directional component of magnetic field measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of the first eye. It should be further appreciated, that the value of a specific directional component of magnetic field measured by the first field sensor 140a will also be changed by changes in the direction the magnetic field source 50b, and the accompanying changes in the field at the location of the first field sensor 140a. Since the magnetic field source 50b is implanted in the second eye (either directly, or indirectly via being mounted in the second switchable lens device 110b), then field values measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of the second eye. Accordingly, field values measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of both the first eye and the second eye.
It should be also appreciated that the second switchable lens device 110b can include multiple magnets that can establish multiple identifiable magnetic fields. Moreover, a single identifiable magnetic field oriented at an acute or obtuse angle relative to the second optic axis 60b can be represented by superpositioning two or more identifiable magnetic fields established by multiple magnets. Conversely, a single tilted identifiable magnetic field source (e.g., magnetic field source oriented at 45° relative to the second optic axis 60b) can be represented as two magnetic field sources: e.g., an in- plane field source m\\ oriented parallel to the plane of the IOL (i.e., orthogonal to the optical axis 60b), and an out-of-plane field source mL oriented perpendicular to the plane of the IOL (i.e., along the optical axis 60b). The first field sensor 140a can be configured to measure magnetic field at a specified angle relative to the optical axis 60a. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can determine change in vergence between the first and second eyes of the subject responsive to the signals received from the field sensor 140a and from the acceleration sensors 145a or 145b. For example, the controller 130a can make a first determination of whether movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence or a tilt of the eyes based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, as described above. The controller 130a can make a second determination of whether movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence or tilt of the eye based on the signals received from the field sensor 140a. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can make a third determination of the position or change in vergence by comparing the first determination to the second determination (e.g., when the first and second determinations indicate a change in vergence, the controller 130a can make the third determination that the movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence). Moreover, the controller 130a determined the value of the change in vergence by comparing the first and second determined changes in the vergence (e.g., by taking an average of the first and second determined changes in the vergence). In an embodiment, the controller 130a can generate a switching signal based on the third determination (e.g., the controller 130a can switch or direct switching of the first or second lens 1 1 1a, 1 1 1b responsive to the third determination).
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can determine that the first determination of change in vergence (e.g., determination based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b) is different than the second determination of change in version (e.g., determination based on the signals received from the field sensor). For example, the first determination can indicate that the subject's eyes are tilting, while the second determination can indicate that the subject' s eye are converging or diverging, or vice versa. Hence, for example, the controller 130a can be configured to generate a third determination that corresponds to maintaining the optical settings (e.g., the focal length) of the first or second lens 1 1 1a, 1 1 lb. As described above, the acceleration sensor(s) can be associated with the first or second eye of the subject by any number of suitable mechanisms. For example, the acceleration sensor can be mechanically connected to the switchable lens device. Additionally or alternatively, the acceleration sensor can be implanted in the first or second eye of the subject. Also, remote acceleration sensor (that can be placed externally to the first and second eye) can be included in a personal electronic device that can be on the subject, implanted under the skin of the subject, or included in any number of suitable devices sized and configured to be carried by the subject. Again, the remote acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the controller 130a and can send one or more signals to the controller 130a.
Moreover, the switchable lens device can include any number of suitable switchable lenses that can be associated with the first or second eye of the subject to provide corrective focusing for the corresponding eye of the subject. FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a switchable lens systems 100c, lOOd worn by subject 70. Specifically, the switchable lens system 100c includes switchable lens devices 1 10c, HOd. The switchable lens device 1 10c can include a first switchable contact lens that can be positioned in the first eye 20 of the subject 70, and the switchable lens device HOd can include a second switchable contact lens HOd that can be positioned in second eye 30 of the subject 70. Except as otherwise described herein, the switchable lens system 100c can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein.
For example, the switchable lens system 100c can include one or more acceleration sensors that can be associated with the first eye 20 or second eye 30 and detect respective movements thereof, as described above. In an embodiment, the switchable lens system 100c can include an acceleration sensor 146c, that can be positioned remotely from the first eye 20 or second eye 30. Specifically, for example, the acceleration sensor 146c can be positioned on or mechanically connected to the head of the subject 70 (e.g., such as to detect movement of the subject 70 or movement of the subject' s head). In an embodiment, the acceleration sensor 146c can be operably coupled to the controller. For example, as described above, the controller can receive one or more signals from the acceleration sensor 146c. In some embodiments, the signals received from the acceleration sensor 146c can be processed or used by the controller to filter out noise from the acceleration sensors associated with the first eye 20 or with the second eye 30 and sensing the respective motion or acceleration thereof. In the illustrated embodiment, the acceleration sensor 146c is shown as positioned between the first and second eyes 20, 30 of the subject 70. For example, the acceleration sensor 146c can be implanted under the skin of the subject 70 (e.g., near the nose of the subject 70). It should be appreciated, however, that the acceleration sensor 146c can be located at any suitable location (e.g., as described above).
Also, as mentioned above, the controller or one or more portions thereof can be located at any number of suitable locations. For example, one or more portions of the controller can be included in a personal electronic device (e.g., the portable electronic device can include an acceleration sensor or can receive one or more signals from one or more acceleration sensors, such as from the acceleration sensor 146a). Moreover, the acceleration sensor 146c can be operably connected to the controller with any number of suitable connections (e.g., hardwired or wireless).
In an embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, a switchable lens device HOe can include or can be coupled to a communication device 200 (e.g., at least one receiver, transmitter, transceiver, or combinations thereof) that can receive data or instructions related to modification of the focal length(s) of one or more switchable lenses of the switchable lens device 1 lOe. As described above, a switchable lens system can include the controller 130e (e.g., the controller 130e can receive one or more signals and can determine vergence rotation of the eye and/or suitable focal length for the switchable lenses of the switchable lens device HOe). In an embodiment, the controller 130e can include I/O interface 220, processor 230, and memory 240 operably coupled together. In an embodiment, the controller 130e can include a database 250 (e.g., the database 340 and can have data stored in a storage memory of the controller 130e). For example, the controller 130e can store one or more parameters in the database 340 (e.g., the controller 130e can store training or tuning data in the database 340).
In an embodiment, a communication device 210 (e.g., at least one receiver, transmitter, transceiver, or combinations thereof) can be operably coupled to the controller 130e and/or integrated therewith. For example, the communication device 210 can be operably coupled to the communication device 200 (e.g., via wired or wireless connection), such that the switchable lens device 1 lOe and the controller 130e can transmit and receive data from one another. In an embodiment, display 260 and/or input device 270 (e.g., physical or virtual keyboard, microphone, etc.) can be operably coupled to the controller 130e and/or integrated therewith. For example, a user (e.g., a subject using and/or wearing the switchable lens device HOe) can enter input and/or data into the controller 130e, as described herein. Moreover, it should be appreciated that the controller 130e can be operably coupled to and/or incorporated with any number of suitable devices, such as personal electronic devices (e.g., personal computers, smart phones, tablets, etc.) and/or any other computing and/or input devices. It should be appreciated that any of the systems described herein (e.g., multi-focus lens systems, IOL systems, etc.) can have a similar or the same configuration as the system described above and illustrated in FIG. 7.
Other embodiments disclosed herein are directed to switchable lens devices such as IOL devices and systems, and methods that include determining relative tilt or vergence of a subject' s eyes and focusing one or more lenses based on the determined vergence or a change therein. In the following detailed description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings, which form a part hereof. In the drawings, similar symbols typically identify similar components, unless context dictates otherwise. The illustrative embodiments described in the detailed description, drawings, and claims are not meant to be limiting. Other embodiments can be utilized, and other changes can be made, without departing from the spirit or scope of the subject matter presented here.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device can include one or more sensors configured to detect movement of at least one eye of the subject (e.g., to determine a least one of position, velocity, or acceleration of at least on eye of the subject). For example, the switchable lens device can include one or more acceleration sensors that can be operably coupled to or associated with a first eye or a second eye of the subject. In an embodiment, a first acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the first eye, and a second acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the second eye of the subject.
For example, the first and second acceleration sensors can move together with the corresponding first and second eyes of the subject, and can generate one or more signals that can correspond to the movement of the first and second eyes. Generally, the first and second acceleration sensors can include any suitable sensor capable of sensing or detecting acceleration. For example, acceleration sensors can include one or more of a MEMS accelerometer, a gyroscope, combinations or arrays thereof, etc. In an embodiment, the first acceleration sensor or the second acceleration sensor can be associated with or mechanically coupled to the switchable lens device. For example, the first acceleration sensor can be mechanically coupled to a first switchable lens of the switchable lens device, and the second acceleration sensor can be mechanically coupled to a second switchable lens of the switchable lens device.
In one or more embodiments, the switchable lens system can include at least one switchable lens device (e.g., an IOL device, a contact lens, etc.) that can be positioned in an eye of a subject. The acceleration sensor can be operably connected to the eye of the subject, such as to detect motion of the eye responsive to a vergence of the subject's eyes. Moreover, the acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to a controller that can direct the switchable lens to change an optical setting (e.g., a focal length) responsive to the output of the acceleration sensor, which is related to the vergence rotation. For example, as the eyes of the subject tilt or pivot, the accelerometer can detect a change in the velocity of the first eye or of the second eye (e.g., an acceleration of the first or second eye), and the detected changes in the velocity can be related to a vergence between the eyes of the subject.
In an embodiment, acceleration sensor can include a plurality of accelerometers that can be positioned in or operably coupled to the first eye or the second eye. For example, the plurality of accelerometers (e.g., an array of accelerometers) can determine acceleration of the first eye along multiple directions. Additionally, the plurality of accelerometers can determine acceleration of the second eye along multiple directions. In an embodiment, the controller can receive signals from the plurality of accelerometers and can determine angular acceleration or angular velocity of the first eye or of the second eye.
In an embodiment, the controller can compare signals received from the accelerometer sensor(s) to distinguish the vergence rotation from tilt rotation of the subject's eyes. For example, acceleration signals having a short duration and representative of higher acceleration of the eyes (e.g., compared to a selected or determined duration or acceleration values) can be associated with the change in vergence. Moreover, in an embodiment, the controller can determine a new focal length (e.g., a focal length to which to switch the switchable lens) responsive to the direction or the angular velocity or acceleration, as determined by the accelerometer(s). Hence, for example, the controller can generate one or more switching signals responsive at least in part to one or more signals received from the accelerometer(s).
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device can include one or more additional sensors (e.g., in addition to the acceleration sensors). For example, the switchable lens device can include one or more energy field sensors (e.g., magnetic or electric field sensors) and one or more field sources that can establish an identifiable field that can be sensed or detected by the field sensors. For example, the field can be an identifiable magnetic field established by a permanent or electromagnet. Furthermore, as discussed below in more detail, the field source (e.g., a magnetic field source) can be positioned in at least one eye of the subject. For example, the field source can be embedded in or mounted to a switchable lens device (e.g., IOL device, contact lens, etc.), that can be located in one of the subject's eye. Alternatively or additionally, the field source can be positioned near, but externally to one or both of the subject' s eyes. In an embodiment, one or more sensors positioned in one or both eyes of the subject can detect a change in the identifiable field, or in a component thereof, during vergence rotation (e.g., as the vergence between the eyes changes), such as when the eyes converge or diverge. Hence, for example, the detected change in an identifiable magnetic field or a component thereof can correspond to a change in the vergence between the eyes.
As mentioned above, the switchable device system can include a controller. For example, the controller can be operably coupled to the field sensor and can receive detection output from the sensor. More specifically, the detection outputs from the sensor can be based on the detected change in the field or based on the one or more components thereof, which can be related to vergence rotation between the eyes of the subject. In an embodiment, the control can distinguish between vergence rotation of the eyes and co-tilt rotation of the eyes (e.g., when the eyes of the subject tilt in the same direction, such as to view an object located peripherally or to a side of the subject). As a consequence of such distinguishing, in such embodiments, each switchable lens can act independently of the other, reaching an accurate vergence determination (and hence an accurate focal length determination) on its own, without a need for communication between both of the switchable lenses so as to compare each switchable lens determined tilt with that of the other switchable lens in order to decide which portion of each switchable lens's tilt represents vergence and which represents co-tilt.
As discussed above, the switchable lens can be switchable between two or more focal lengths (e.g., a first focal length for distance vision and a second focal length for close-up vision). Moreover, the switchable lens device can include a single or multiple switchable lenses that can be directed or switched between two or more focal lengths by the controller. Moreover, the controller can be operably connected to the sensor(s) and can receive outputs therefrom, which can be related to the detected change in the field and, hence, to vergence rotation between the eyes. In an embodiment, the controller can switch or direct switching of the switchable lenses at least partially based on the outputs received from the sensor(s) or the one or more signals received from the accelerometer.
In an embodiment, the controller can compare the determination of change in vergence between the first eye and the second eye (e.g., whether the tilt of the first and second eye corresponds to a change in vergence), which is determined responsive to the one or more signals received from the accelerometer(s), to the determination of change in vergence, which is determined responsive to the one or more signals received from the sensors. For example, when the signals received from the accelerometer(s) and from the sensors indicate that the tilt of the subject' s eyes corresponds to a change in vergence, the controller can determine that the eyes converged or diverged (e.g., based on the direction of movement of the eyes) or can generate a switching signal for switching the switchable lens from one focal length to another).
In an embodiment, the switchable lens systems disclosed herein can include one or more sensors configured to detect one or more physiological indicia of the subject. For example, the switchable lens system can include one or more sensors configured to detect glucose concentration (e.g., in the eye of the subject), eye pressure, heart rate, biological proteins present in the eye, or any other biological indicia. The one or more sensors can be operably coupled to the controller. The controller of the switchable lens system can be configured to transmit the measurements of the physical indicia to a remote source such as a computer, a cellular phone, or other electronic device. In an embodiment, the measured physical indicia may be used to determine the health of a subject or eye thereof, customize the operation of the switchable lens device to the particular subject, determine if the controller needs to be removed or adjusted, or determine if the focal adjustments of the controller are suitable for the subject. The electronic device may then transmit instructions to the controller to selectively control or otherwise adjust the functioning of the switchable lens system, such as controllably changing the focal length of the switchable lens device.
FIG. 1 schematically illustrates eyes 20 and 30 of a subject focused on a first object 10 that is positioned at a first distance from the subject. In particular, when the eyes 20, 30 are focused on the first object 10, an angle between respective optical axes thereof can be at a vergence angle φι. FIG. 1 also schematically illustrates a switchable lens system 100, according to an embodiment. For example, the switchable lens system 100 can include a first switchable lens device 1 10 positioned in a first eye 20 and a second switchable lens device 110' positioned in a second eye 30 of the subject. In the illustrated embodiment, the switchable lenses 1 10, 1 10' can be intraocular switchable lenses. Additionally or alternatively, the switchable lenses 1 10, 1 10' can be lenses that can be positionable externally to the subject's first and second eyes 20, 30 (e.g., contact lenses). Generally, the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10' can be configured to augment or correct visual deficiencies of the subject or to replace the lenses in the respective first eye 20 or second eye 30 of the subject (e.g., in cataract surgeries). It should be appreciated that, in one or more embodiments, the switchable lens system 100 can include only a single switchable lens (e.g., the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10'), which can be positioned in the first eye 20 or in the second eye 30. The switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to or set at a first focal length, such that the light entering the eye from the distance of the first object 10 is focused on the retina of the respective eyes 20, 30, thereby focusing the eyes 20, 30 on the first object 10.
When the subject focuses on another object, such as an object that is closer to the subject than the first object 10, the object's eyes 20, 30 can tilt such as to converge, thereby changing the angle between the optical axes thereof. FIG. 2 schematically shows the subject's eyes 20, 30 focused on a second object 40, which is positioned at a second distance and closer to the subject than the first object 10 (FIG. 1). For example, when the eyes 20, 30 focus on the second object 40, the angle between the optical axis thereof can change to a second angle φ2. More specifically, as the eyes 20, 30 focus on the closer, second object 40, the eyes 20, 30 converge or in-tilt, such that the second angle φ2 defined by the respective optical axis thereof is greater than the first angle φι.
In an embodiment, responsive to the changed tilt between the eyes 20, 30, the switchable lens devices 110 or 1 10' can be switched to the second focal length, which can be shorter than the first focal length. The switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can include one or more sensors that can sense or detect a change in an identifiable field (e.g., magnetic field) and can correlate that change to the change vergence rotation between the eyes 20, 30 (e.g., convergence to focus on a closer object or divergence to focus on a farther object). Similarly, as the subject attempts to focus eyes 20, 30 on an object at a distance that is greater than the distance to the second object 40 (e.g., on the first object 10 (FIG. 1)), the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to the first focal length (longer than the second focal length).
Moreover, as described below in more detail, the switchable lens devices 1 10 or
1 10' can distinguish between vergence rotation from co-tilt rotation (e.g., when the eyes 20, 30 rotate in the same direction, such as to observe an object located peripherally from the user). As such, for example, the switchable lens device 1 10 or 1 10' can switch focal length responsive to detected vergence rotation. In an embodiment, the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can maintain a previously set focal length during co-tilt of the eyes 20, 30.
As mentioned above, the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be located in the subject's eyes (e.g., in the eye 20 or in the eye 30). FIG. 3 is a schematic side, cross- sectional view of the eye 20 with the switchable lens device 1 10 implanted therein (e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device), according to an embodiment. It should be appreciated that, while the description herein is related to the switchable lens device 1 10 and to the corresponding eye 20 of the subject, the switchable lens device 1 10' or its location in the eye 30 (FIGS. 1-2) can have the same or similar configuration. Generally, the eye 20 includes a cornea 21, an iris 22, a natural lens, and a retina 23 therebehind. One or more switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted in the eye 20. For example, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted over the natural lens, in front of (e.g., in the anterior chamber) or behind the iris 22 (e.g., in the posterior chamber), or internal to the natural lens such as in a capsular bag 24 of the natural lens. In an embodiment, the natural lens can be absent from the eye 20 (e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 can replace the natural lens and can be placed in the anterior chamber, the posterior chamber, or internal to the capsular bag that is used to contain the natural lens).
Generally, the switchable lens 1 10 can be any suitable lens that is configured to switch between at least two different optical settings (e.g., between two different focal lengths) responsive to one or more electrical inputs. Hence, for example, a controller can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 10 among two or more optical settings. In an embodiment, the switchable lens 1 10 can be an electrically-modifiable diffractive lens, as described in more detail in U. S. Application No. 14/807,673, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference. Additionally or alternatively, the switchable lens 1 10 can be liquid crystal lens (e.g., a liquid crystal lens with an electrically tunable focal length).
Generally, as described below in more detail, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a lens 1 1 1 and haptics 1 12 connected to or integrated with the lens 1 1 1. In an embodiment, the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on or secured to one or more structures in the eye 20, thereby positioning or securing the switchable lens device 1 10 in the eye 20. For example, the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on the ciliary body or muscles or in or on the capsular bag 24 of the natural lens. The lens 1 1 1 can be located laterally in the center of the eye 20 with the haptics 1 12 extending laterally therefrom. As mentioned above, the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10 can be switched between two or more focal lengths, to focus light entering the eye from a selected distance on the retina 23 of the eye 20, thereby providing a focus on an object located at the selected focal length and augmenting or correcting the vision of the subject. Again, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include lenses that can be at least partially positionable externally to the subject' s eyes, such as contact lenses. For example, the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be included in or can comprise a contact lens, the can be positionable near the subject' s eye. In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be substantially fixed within the eye 20 (e.g., the IOL device can be substantially immobile relative to the optical axis of the eye 20). As such, for example, movement of the eye 20 can result in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10. In particular, as the eye 20 tilts or pivots in the eye socket, the switchable lens device 1 10 can correspondingly tilt or pivot together with the eye 20. Furthermore, one, some, or all of the elements or components of the switchable lens device 1 10 can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye 20 or relative to the optical axis thereof, as described below in more detail.
FIGS 4A and 4B illustrate switchable lens device 1 10, according to an embodiment. FIG. 4A is a top view of the switchable lens device 1 10, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the switchable lens device 1 10. The switchable lens device 1 10 can be configured to fit in or on one or more anatomical structures of the eye and can include the lens 1 1 1 and one or more haptics 1 12. As described above, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be an IOL device, a contact lens device, etc. For example, as will be apparent from the disclosure herein, a contact lens can be configured without the haptics 1 12.
As shown in FIG. 4A, in an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 includes the lens 1 1 1. For example, the lens 1 1 1 can be configured to focus light onto the surface of the retina and can be substantially circular or elliptical. Furthermore, the lens 1 1 1 can be switchable between two or more optical settings, such as between two or more focal lengths (e.g., between three or more focal lengths).
In an embodiment, the lens 1 1 1 can include or can be configured as a switchable diffractive lens. Additionally or alternatively, the lens 1 1 1 can include or can be configured as a refractive lens that can have a selectively modifiable index of refraction and focal length (e.g., a variable focus refractive lens). In any embodiment, the lens 1 11 can be switched at least between the first focal length and at least a second focal length.
In an embodiment, a controller 130 can include control electrical circuitry that can be operably coupled to the lens 1 1 1 and can switch or direct switching of the lens 1 1 1 between two or more optical settings, such as between two or more focal lengths. For example, the control electrical circuitry of the controller can generate a switching signal and, responsive at least partially to the switching signal, the lens 1 1 1 can switch from a first optical setting, such as a first focal length, to a second optical setting, such as a second optical length. In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, a controller 130 can be mounted on or embedded in the haptics 1 12, in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 110, or in another suitable portion of the switchable lens device 1 10. Moreover, the controller 130 can receive a detection output from one or more sensors, such as from an acceleration sensor, field sensor, physiological characteristic sensor, etc. The detection output(s) from the sensor(s) can be related or correspond to the vergence rotation between the subject's eyes. At least partially based on the received detection output, the controller 130 can switch the lens 1 1 1 to a suitable or predetermined focal length.
For example, the controller 130 can be operably coupled to and can receive a detection outputs from a field sensor 140 or from an acceleration sensor 145. It should be appreciated that the field sensor 140 can include a single or multiple sensors that can detect presence or changes in a magnetic field. The acceleration sensor 145 can also include a single accelerometer, gyroscope, etc., or multiple accelerometers, gyroscopes, etc., (e.g., two or more of which can be arranged in an array). As described above, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the physiological characteristic sensor, etc., can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, the field sensor 140 or the acceleration sensor 145 can be mounted on or embedded in the haptics 1 12 or in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10. Generally, the field sensor 140 can be any suitable sensor, such as sensor(s) suitable for detecting changes in the identifiable magnetic or electric field, which can correspond to vergence rotation of the eyes, as described below in more detail. As mentioned above, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include acceleration sensor 145, which can include any number of suitable sensors for detecting acceleration (or change in velocity or acceleration) of the subject' s first or second eye. Moreover, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, or any additional sensors, such as physiological characteristics sensor, can be embedded in or mounted on the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., MEMS-based sensors that can be embedded in or mounted on one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10). Examples of suitable field sensors include Hall effect sensors, magnetoresi stance sensors (e.g., AMR magnetometer, GMR magnetometer), induction coils, magneto-diodes, Lorentz force based sensors, an electron tunneling based sensor, or a MEMS compass. For example, the field sensor 140 can generate one or more detection outputs (e.g., a measurable change in voltage or resonant frequency) that can be related to or based on the changes in the position of an identifiable magnetic field, which can be related to the change in vergence between the subject's eyes. In an embodiment, the field sensor 140 can generate a signal that can include detection output of the field sensor 140. Examples of suitable acceleration sensors include MEMS-based accelerometers, MEMS-based gyroscopes (e.g., vibrating structure gyroscope), etc. For example, as described above, one or more signals received from the acceleration sensor 145 can be related to motion of the first or second eye of the subject and change in vergence therebetween.
The acceleration sensor 145 can be operably coupled or connected to the controller 130. As described above, the acceleration sensor 145 can be mechanically coupled to the switchable lens device 1 10 that can be operably connected or secured to the right or left eye of the subject. Hence, for example, the acceleration sensor 145 can generate one or more signals responsive to movement of the eye (e.g., responsive to the movement of the eye to which the switchable lens device 1 10 is connected), as the acceleration sensor 145 moves together with the eye.
In an embodiment, as the subject moves the eye together with the switchable lens device 1 10, the acceleration sensor 145 can generate one or more signals responsive to the motion of the eye, and the controller 130 can receive the signal(s) from the acceleration sensor 145. In particular, for example, responsive to the signal(s) received from the acceleration sensor 145, the controller 130 can determine acceleration of the eye (e.g., the rate of change of the eye' s velocity and direction thereof), velocity of the eye (e.g., the rate of movement of the eye and movement direction). In an embodiment, the controller 130 can determine angular acceleration or velocity of the eye, at least partially responsive to the signal(s) received from the acceleration sensor 145 (e.g., at least partially based on the signals received from multiple accelerometers that can comprise the acceleration sensor 145, the controller 130 can determine the direction and magnitude of angular acceleration and velocity of the subject's eye).
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can optionally include a field source 150 (e.g., a magnetic field source), which can establish an identifiable magnetic field that can be detectable by an additional sensor that can be operably coupled to an additional controller. The field source 150 can be a dipole magnet (e.g., a permanent magnet, an electromagnet, combination of the foregoing, etc.) and can establish or generate a corresponding identifiable dipole magnetic field. Furthermore, the field source 150 can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, the field source 150 can be embedded in the haptics 112 (as shown in FIG. 4B) or in the lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
In an embodiment, the field source 150 can be generally fixed in or stationary relative to the eye. Additionally or alternatively, the field source 150 can have a predetermine orientation relative to the eye or to the optical axis thereof. For example, the field source can be embedded within the switchable lens device 1 10 at a first predetermined orientation relative to the switchable lens device 1 10, and the switchable lens device 1 10 can be implanted within the eye at a second predetermined orientation relative to the eye. As such, for example, the identifiable field, such as an identifiable magnetic field can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye or relative to the optical axis thereof.
Moreover, in an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be positioned in the eye in a manner that movement of the eye results in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10. Hence, for example, movement of the eye can produce a corresponding movement of the field source 150 and of the magnetic field established thereby. As such, a sensor detects the change in the established identifiable magnetic field, which can correspond to the movement of the identifiable magnetic field and of the eye (e.g., the movement of the eye can be tilting or pivoting of the eye that at least partially corresponds to a vergence rotation between the eyes). Methods, devices, and systems suitable for establishing one or more identifiable energy fields, measuring the energy fields, and determining change in the vergence rotation between the eyes based at least in part on the measurements are more fully described in U. S. Patent Application No. 14/807,719, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
The switchable lens device(s) can be located in one or in both eyes of the subject. In an embodiment, a switchable lens device in the first eye can communicate with another switchable lens in the second eye, and vice versa (e.g., the switchable lens devices can be operably coupled together). For example, the switchable lens device in the second eye can send to the switchable lens device 1 10 in the first eye the detection output received from a first sensor in the switchable lens in the second eye, can send focal length determination, etc. In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a communication device 160 (e.g., the controller 130 can be operably coupled to the communication device 160). The communication device 160 can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, the communication device 160 can be embedded in the haptics 1 12 (as shown in FIG. 4B) or in the lens 11 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
The communication device 160 can be wireless (e.g., the communication device 160 can be a transmitter or a transceiver) or wired. For example, a wireless (e.g., RF- based or US-based) connection can be established between the communication device 160 and another or additional communication device. Alternatively, the communication device 160 and another communication device can have a wired connection therebetween. For example, an electrical conductor connecting the communication device 160 and another communication device can be implanted in or near the eyes of the subject. In any embodiment, the communication device 160 can be operably coupled to the additional communication device, such as to send data therebetween.
In an embodiment, one or more of the controller 130, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, or communication device 160 can be operably coupled or connected to a power source. For example, the power source can include a rechargeable energy storage device or battery (not shown) that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. The battery can be wirelessly recharged (e.g., a wireless or inductive charger can recharge the battery). In an embodiment, the battery can be operably connected to a photovoltaic cell that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. Alternatively or additionally, the battery can be operably connected or coupled to a charge port that can be configured to accept a charging device. In any event, the power source can power one or more of the controller 130, field sensor 140, field source 150, or communication device 160. In an embodiment, the power source may include a parasitic power device, such as an induction coil, one or more photocells, thermoelectric device, or any other device configured to harvest energy from a subject or the environment. For example, the induction coil can include a channel having a magnet therein, the channel passing the induction coil upon movement of the subject (e.g., eye-movement or blinking). In an embodiment, an induction coil can be disposed in the eye of a subject (e.g., in or adjacent to the switchable lens) and a corresponding magnet may be positioned on an adjacent part of the subject (e.g., an eyelid or bridge of the nose) whereby movement of the eye or eyelid can cause a current in the induction coil.
Again, while the switchable lens device 1 10 is described as including the controller 130, the field sensor 140, the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, and communication device 160, configurations of the switchable lens device 1 10 can vary from one embodiment to the next. In particular, for example, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include only the controller 130 and the acceleration sensor 145 that can detect a change in the position, velocity, or acceleration of the subject's first or second eye). Also, one of the switchable lens device (e.g., of a switchable lens system) can include only the acceleration sensor 145, the field source 150, and the controller 130, which the other switchable lens device can include the field sensor 140 that can be operably coupled to the controller 130.
As described above, the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device or multiple switchable lens devices (e.g., a switchable lens device can be located in one or in both eyes of the subject). Generally, the switchable lens devices of the switchable lens system can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10. It should be appreciated, however, that any of the switchable lens devices included in the switchable lens systems described herein can include or can be operably coupled to any number of controllers, sensors, field sources, communication devices, or combinations thereof, which can be similar to or the same as the controller 130, field sensor 140, acceleration sensor 145, field source 150, and communication device 160. It should be appreciated that the field source 150 or the field sensor 140 are optional for the switchable lens device 1 10 or for operation thereof or of the controller 130.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device 1 10 or can include multiple switchable lens devices that can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., the switchable lens system 100 (FIGS. 1-2)). FIGS. 5A-5B schematically illustrate a switchable lens system 100a that includes a first switchable lens device 1 10a in the first or right eye (not shown), and a second switchable lens device 1 10b in the second or left eye (not shown), according to an embodiment. It should be appreciated that designations, first eye/right eye and second eye/left eye are used for ease of description only and should not be read as limiting (e.g., the first switchable lens device 1 10a can be positioned in the second or left eye and the second switchable lens device 1 10b can be positioned in the first or right eye). Except as otherwise described herein, any of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, second switchable lens device 1 10b, and their elements and components can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens devices 1 10, 1 10' (FIGS. 1-4B) and their corresponding elements and components.
FIG. 5A illustrates the first switchable lens device 1 10a and the second switchable lens device 1 10b, with respective first and second optical axes 60a and 60b of the first and second eyes oriented to define a first angle φ1 therebetween, at which the eyes are focused on first object at first distance from the subject. FIG. 5B shows the first and second eye focused on a second object that is closer than the first object, and the first and second optical axes 60a, 60b define a second angle φ2 that is smaller than the first angle φι.
In an embodiment, the first switchable lens device 1 10a includes a first field sensor 140a and a first acceleration sensor 145a operably coupled to a controller 130a including control electrical circuitry (e.g., the first field sensor 140a, first acceleration sensor 145a, or controller 130a can be embedded in one or more portions of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, such as in the haptics 1 12a of the first switchable lens device 1 10a). Moreover, the controller 130a can be operably coupled to first lens 1 1 la of the first switchable lens device 1 10a, such as to switch or direct switching of the focal length of the first lens 1 1 la at least between two different focal lengths.
As described above, the first switchable lens device 1 10a can include a first acceleration sensor 145a, and the second switchable lens device 1 10b can include a second acceleration sensor 145b. Moreover, the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b can be operably associated with the respective first and second eyes of the subject, such that movement of the first eye correspondingly moves the first switchable lens device 1 10a, and movement of the second eye moves the second switchable lens device 1 10b. Hence, as the subject moves or tilts the eyes toward or away from each other, to change the vergence therebetween, the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b of the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b can detect the movement of the eyes.
Moreover, the one or more signals received by the controller 130 from one or more acceleration sensors (e.g., from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b) can be related to or indicative of acceleration of the first eye and of the second eye. Hence, the controller 130a can determine the velocity of the first eye by integrating the function of the acceleration (e.g., over time, to determine velocity at a specific time), which can be generated responsive to the one or more signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b. Also, the controller 130 can determine the position or change in position of the first eye and second eye (e.g., by integrating over time the function of velocity).
In an embodiment, as described above, the controller 130a can determine a change in vergence between the eyes based on the determined acceleration, velocity, or position (or change in position) of each of the eyes. Additionally, the controller 130a can distinguish the change in vergence between the first eye and second eye and tilt of the first eye or the second eye. For example, when tilted, the optical axes 60a, 60b of the first and second eyes can be oriented substantially parallel to each other, while when focused on an object in front of the subject, the optical axes 60a, 60b can be oriented at non parallel angles (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 5A-5B), where the first and second angles φι, φ2 are non- zero angles. Hence, for example, the controller 130a can determine the first and second angles φι, φ2 based on the change in one or more of the acceleration, velocity, or angular position or orientation of the first and second eyes. Moreover, the controller 130a can determine the first and second angles φι, φ2 based on the change the field or one or more of the components thereof, as detected by the field sensor 140a or 140b. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can determine one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye based on the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor 145a and one or more second signals received from the second acceleration sensor 145b. For example, the controller 130a can include or can be operably connected to a data table that can correlate one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye with the vergence between the eyes. For example, the subject can train the controller 130a or generate the table responsive to prompts from the controller 130a.
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, determine one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye, and prompt user for input identifying the vergence or tilt of the eyes; the input can be stored in the table and correlated with the signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b. Additionally or alternatively, the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, determine one or more of a change difference in angular position, a change difference in angular velocity, or a change difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye, and prompt user for input identifying the vergence or tilt of the eyes; the input can be stored in the table and correlated with the change in signals received from the first and second accelerometers 145a, 145b or with the changes in the acceleration, velocity, or position.
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b and can generate one or more switching signals for switching the lenses 1 1 la or 1 1 lb from a first optical setting to a second optical setting. For example, the lens 1 1 1a or lens 1 1 1b can have a first focal length at the first optical setting and a second focal length at the second optical setting.
In an embodiment, multiple switchable lenses can be switched or controlled by a single controller, such as the controller 130a. Additionally or alternatively, each of the multiple lenses can include a controller and the respective controllers can be operably coupled to each other (e.g., via hardwired connection, wireless connection, etc.), such that a first controller receives one or more signals from a second controller and vice versa. For example, first controller can receive signals from second controller; the signals can be related to the acceleration or velocity of the second eye (e.g., based on the one or more signals received at the second controller from the acceleration sensor). Moreover, multiple controllers, each of which can include a respective electrical circuitry, can operate collectively as a single controller that can generate one or more switching signals for a first lens in the first eye of the subject or for the second lens in the second eye of the subject.
It should be appreciated that the controller 130a or one or more portions thereof can be located at any number of suitable locations (e.g., relative to the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can be located remotely from the at least one or from both of the first and second switchable lenses 1 1 1a, 1 1 1b. For example, a portion of the controller 130a can be located or included in a personal electronic device (e.g., a smart phone or the like).
Generally, the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b can be operably coupled to the controller 130a with any number of suitable connections. For example, the acceleration sensor 145a or 145b can be operably coupled to the controller 130a via at least one of a radio frequency connection, an optical transmission connection, an ultrasonic connection, or an electrical-conductor connection. Additionally or alternatively, the first or second acceleration sensor 145a, 145b can be coupled to the controller 130a by a hardwired connection.
As described above, the controller 130 can generate one or more switching signals to switch or direct switching of the lens 1 1 1 from a first optical setting to a second optical setting, or vice versa. In an embodiment, the controller 130 can generate the one or more switching signals responsive to the one or more signals received from first acceleration sensor 145a that detected motion of the first eye or from the one or more signals received from second acceleration sensor 145b that detected motion of the second eye. That is, for example, the controller 130 can generate the one or more switching signals responsive to the detected change in vergence between the first eye and second eye, and detection of the change in vergence between the eyes can be based on determined acceleration or velocity of the eyes (e.g., angular acceleration or velocity determined by the controller 130 based on one or more signals received from the acceleration sensor(s)). In an embodiment, at least one acceleration sensor can be located outside of the first and second switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10b. For example, at least one acceleration sensor can be positioned remotely from the subject's first and second eyes. At least one acceleration sensor that is positioned externally to the first and second eyes of the subject can be operably coupled to the controller 130a; hence, in an embodiment, one or more signals received by the controller 130a from such sensor(s) can be associated with the general movement of the subject and not with the movement of the subject' s first or second eye (e.g., can be associated with movement of the subject's body or head).
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can compare the signals or acceleration determined from the remote acceleration sensor(s), which are positioned remotely of the subject's eyes, to the signals or acceleration determined from the first or second accelerations sensor 145a, 145b. For example, the controller 130a can filter out at least some of the noise that may be present in the signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b (e.g., the controller 130a can subtract the acceleration determined from the remote acceleration sensors from the acceleration determined from one or more of the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b). In an embodiment, the controller 130a can filter out one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, such as signals that may correspond to general vibration of one or more portions of the sensors (e.g., noise from vibration of the mass of a MEMS sensor that may occur without movement of the subject or subject' s eyes) and can filter out signals resulting from movement of the subject (e.g., walking, driving, etc.).
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can include or can be operably connected to a storage that includes or stores signal samples corresponding to signal noise. For example, the controller 130a can receive one or more signals from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b while the subject is not moving the eye and standing still, while the subject is walking, while the subject is driving, etc. (e.g., to identify noise signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b under different conditions when the subject is not moving the eyes). Hence, the controller 130a can filter out or ignore one or more signals or portions of the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, which correspond or similar to the noise signals previously received by the controller 130a (e.g., during calibration of the controller 130a). Moreover, during use of the switchable lens system 100a, the noise characteristics of the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b can change over time. In some embodiments, the controller 130a can be configured to retest or rest the stored noise signals. For example, to calibrate or recalibrate the controller 130a or the first or second acceleration sensor 145a, 145b, the subject can periodically perform various activities without moving eyes and provide feedback or input to the controller 130a that can correlate various conditions of the subject, such as walking, sitting, driving, etc., with noise signals received from the first and second acceleration sensors 145a, 145b. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can reject or filter out signals related to or indicative of up and down movements of the eyes. For example, based on one or more received signals or inputs (e.g., based on signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b), the controller 130a can determine orientation of the subject's head relative to gravitational vector. Moreover, as described herein, based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, the controller 130a can determine direction of movement of the subject's eyes relative to the head of the subject. For example, the controller 130a can determine movement of the subject's eyes relative to the gravitational vector and correlate the determined movement to the orientation of the subject's head relative to the gravitational vector to determine the movement of the eyes relative to the head. Hence, for example, the controller 130a can filter out signals from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, which correspond to up and down movement of the eyes relative to the subject' s head, such as toward the forehead and toward the nose (e.g., irrespective of the orientation of the subject' s head), or up or down movement of the subject's head.
In some embodiments, the controller 130a can be configured to differentiate at least one noise signal and at least one detection signal by comparing magnitude of a signal to the magnitude of a second signal and by identifying the first signal as the at least one noise signal. For example, both the first and second signals can be received from the same acceleration sensor (e.g., from the first acceleration sensor 145a or from the second sensor 145b). In an embodiment, the controller 130a can filter out signals below a certain magnitude threshold. For example, the controller 130a can determine an average signal level while the subject is not moving the eyes and filter out or subtract signals below the threshold of the average signal level.
As described above, at least one of the switchable lens devices can include an energy field sensor (e.g., a sensor configured to detect a change in a magnetic or electric field). Moreover, in some embodiments, at least one of the switchable lens devices can include a field source that can generate an identifiable energy field (e.g., a magnetic field) that can be detected by the energy field sensor. In the illustrated embodiment, the second switchable lens device 110b can include a magnetic field source 150b mounted thereon or embedded therein.
The magnetic field source 150b can establish an identifiable magnetic field 50b that can be sensed by the first field sensor 140a. More specifically, for example, the first field sensor 140a can detect the change in orientation or location of the identifiable magnetic field 50b. It should be also appreciated that the magnetic field source 50b can be positioned or secured in the subject's second eye without the second switchable lens device 1 10b (e.g., the magnetic field source 50b can be implanted in the eye, such as in the sclera of the eye). In any event, in one or more embodiments, the magnetic field source 150b can move and tilt together with the second eye (correspondingly moving the identifiable magnetic field 50b), and the first field sensor 140a can detect the change in the orientation or location of the identifiable magnetic field 50b. It should be also appreciated that any of the elements or components described herein as included in one or more switchable lens devices can be directly implanted in the eye or secured to the eye, without implanting or otherwise associating a switchable lens device in that eye (e.g., a controller, an acceleration sensor, a field source, a field sensor, etc., can be implanted directly in the eye).
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can be configured to correlate the detected change in the identifiable magnetic field 50b with the vergence rotation between the eyes. For example, the first field sensor 140a can generate a detection output that can correspond to a change at least partially corresponding to the vergence rotation by detecting a changed component of the identifiable magnetic field, which can be in a direction substantially perpendicular to a direction of a dominant component of the identifiable magnetic field. Furthermore, the detection output can be received by the controller 130a, and based on the detection output, the controller 130a can determine the vergence rotation between the eyes.
In an embodiment, at least partially based on or from the determined vergence rotation, the controller 130a can determine an apparent or estimated object distance (e.g., the distance from the subject to the object on which the subject' s eyes are attempting to focus). In an embodiment, at least partially based on the determined distance, the controller 130a can determine the first or second focal length for the switchable lens (e.g., for the switchable lens 1 1 1a or for the switchable lens 1 1 1b) and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens to the determined focal length.
Generally, the magnetic field source 50b can be any suitable magnet, which can establish any suitable magnetic field that can vary from one embodiment to the next. In the illustrated embodiment, the magnetic field source 50b is a dipole magnet, such as a permanent magnet (e.g., a ferromagnet). In an embodiment, the magnetic field source 50b can be a dipole electromagnet. In an embodiment, the magnetic field source 50b can generate a magnetic field having both a dipole and a non-dipole contribution. In such an embodiment, the non-dipole contributions generally weaken more with distance from the magnetic field source 50b than do the dipole contributions so that at a sufficient distance from the magnetic field source 50b (e.g., at the sensor location 140a), the dominant contribution is that of a magnetic dipole. In an embodiment, the electromagnet can be operably coupled to the controller 130a or to an additional controller (e.g., to a controller in the second switchable lens device 1 10b), which can turn on or off the electromagnet or can change an intensity of the magnetic field established or generated thereby. For example, the electromagnet can be pulsed in a manner that can distinguish or identify the magnetic field established thereby from other, interfering magnetic fields that can be present in the subject' s environment. Moreover, based on the detection output from the first field sensor 140a, the controller 130a can distinguish the identifiable pulsed magnetic field from other magnetic fields.
Generally, as mentioned above, the first field sensor 140a can be any suitable sensor or multiple sensors, which can be sufficiently miniaturized for placement in the subject's eye (e.g., MEMS based sensors that can be embedded in or mounted on the first switchable lens device 110a). Examples of suitable sensors include Hall effect sensors, magnetoresi stance sensors (e.g., AMR magnetometer, GMR magnetometer), induction coils, magneto-diodes, Lorentz force based sensors, Electron Tunneling based sensor, MEMS compass, etc. In any event, the first field sensor 140a can be or can include any suitable sensor or combination of sensors that can detect the change in the location or orientation of the identifiable magnetic field 50b. In an embodiment, the first switchable lens device 1 10a can be positioned at a predetermined location or orientation relative to the first optical axis 60a of the first eye, and the second switchable lens device 1 10b or the identifiable magnetic field 50b or pole axis of the magnetic field source 150b can be oriented relative to the second optical axis 60b of the second eye at a predetermined pitch angle a. Generally, the predetermined pitch angle can be any suitable angle, which can vary from one embodiment to the next. For example, the pitch angle a can be a non-parallel angle relative to the first or second optical axis 60a, 60b, an obtuse angle, or an acute angle. Moreover, as described below in more detail, the pitch angle can be 0°, such that a magnetic field component of the identifiable magnetic field 50b is substantially parallel to the second optical axis 60b.
Furthermore, the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented such that the first field sensor 140a or the controller 130a can distinguish between in-tilt or convergence of the eyes (e.g., when the subject attempts to change focus on from a first object to a second object that is closer to the subject) from co-tilt of the eyes (e.g., when the subject tilts or pivots eyes to focus on an object located peripherally, such as to the left or to the right of the subject). For example, the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented at about 45° relative to the second optical axis 60b (e.g., within less than 1° of the 45°, within less than 2° of the 45°, within less than 5° of the 45°).
It should be appreciated that the identifiable magnetic field 50b can have any suitable orientation relative to the second optical axis 60b. For example, the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented relative to the second optical axis 60b such that convergence of the eyes results in an increased magnitude or changed direction of the magnetic field vector (e.g., Lorentz force vector), which can be distinguishable from the direction of the magnetic field vector sensed by the first field sensor 140a when the eyes co-tilt, as discussed below in more detail. In other words, the identifiable magnetic field 50b can be oriented such that the detection output received from the first field sensor 140a can be processed by the controller 130a to distinguish or identify the change in magnitude or direction of the Lorentz force vector of the identifiable magnetic field 50b in a manner that the controller 130a can distinguish convergence or in-tilt of the eyes from co-tilt.
It should be also appreciated that the first field sensor 140a of the first switchable lens device 1 10a can be configured to measure the strength and direction of the magnetic field, to measure the component of the magnetic field in a specific sensitivity direction, or to include multiple (collocated or not) magnetic sensors each of which is configured to measure separately directed components of the magnetic field. In an embodiment, the first field sensor 140a includes a sensor configured to measure a magnetic field component oriented at 0° relative to the first optical axis 60a. In an embodiment, the first field sensor 140a includes a sensor configured to measure a magnetic field component oriented at 90° relative to the first optical axis 60a (e.g., in the plane of the first switchable lens device 110a) directed to or away from the second switchable lens device 110b. The first field sensor 140a is mounted or embedded within the first switchable lens device 110a so that as the first eye tilts, changing the direction of first optical axis 60a and first switchable lens device 110a, the sensitivity direction of the first field sensor 140a also changes. Accordingly, the value of a specific directional component of magnetic field measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of the first eye. It should be further appreciated, that the value of a specific directional component of magnetic field measured by the first field sensor 140a will also be changed by changes in the direction the magnetic field source 50b, and the accompanying changes in the field at the location of the first field sensor 140a. Since the magnetic field source 50b is implanted in the second eye (either directly, or indirectly via being mounted in the second switchable lens device 110b), then field values measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of the second eye. Accordingly, field values measured by the first field sensor 140a will change based on changes in the tilt of both the first eye and the second eye.
It should be also appreciated that the second switchable lens device 110b can include multiple magnets that can establish multiple identifiable magnetic fields. Moreover, a single identifiable magnetic field oriented at an acute or obtuse angle relative to the second optic axis 60b can be represented by superpositioning two or more identifiable magnetic fields established by multiple magnets. Conversely, a single tilted identifiable magnetic field source (e.g., magnetic field source oriented at 45° relative to the second optic axis 60b) can be represented as two magnetic field sources: e.g., an in- plane field source m\\ oriented parallel to the plane of the IOL (i.e., orthogonal to the optical axis 60b), and an out-of-plane field source mL oriented perpendicular to the plane of the IOL (i.e., along the optical axis 60b). The first field sensor 140a can be configured to measure magnetic field at a specified angle relative to the optical axis 60a. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can determine change in vergence between the first and second eyes of the subject responsive to the signals received from the field sensor 140a and from the acceleration sensors 145a or 145b. For example, the controller 130a can make a first determination of whether movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence or a tilt of the eyes based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b, as described above. The controller 130a can make a second determination of whether movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence or tilt of the eye based on the signals received from the field sensor 140a. In an embodiment, the controller 130a can make a third determination of the position or change in vergence by comparing the first determination to the second determination (e.g., when the first and second determinations indicate a change in vergence, the controller 130a can make the third determination that the movement of the eyes corresponds to a change in vergence). Moreover, the controller 130a determined the value of the change in vergence by comparing the first and second determined changes in the vergence (e.g., by taking an average of the first and second determined changes in the vergence). In an embodiment, the controller 130a can generate a switching signal based on the third determination (e.g., the controller 130a can switch or direct switching of the first or second lens 1 1 1a, 1 1 1b responsive to the third determination).
In an embodiment, the controller 130a can determine that the first determination of change in vergence (e.g., determination based on the signals received from the acceleration sensors 145a, 145b) is different than the second determination of change in version (e.g., determination based on the signals received from the field sensor). For example, the first determination can indicate that the subject's eyes are tilting, while the second determination can indicate that the subject' s eye are converging or diverging, or vice versa. Hence, for example, the controller 130a can be configured to generate a third determination that corresponds to maintaining the optical settings (e.g., the focal length) of the first or second lens 1 1 1a, 1 1 lb. As described above, the acceleration sensor(s) can be associated with the first or second eye of the subject by any number of suitable mechanisms. For example, the acceleration sensor can be mechanically connected to the switchable lens device. Additionally or alternatively, the acceleration sensor can be implanted in the first or second eye of the subject. Also, remote acceleration sensor (that can be placed externally to the first and second eye) can be included in a personal electronic device that can be on the subject, implanted under the skin of the subject, or included in any number of suitable devices sized and configured to be carried by the subject. Again, the remote acceleration sensor can be operably coupled to the controller 130a and can send one or more signals to the controller 130a.
Moreover, the switchable lens device can include any number of suitable switchable lenses that can be associated with the first or second eye of the subject to provide corrective focusing for the corresponding eye of the subject. FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a switchable lens systems 100c, lOOd worn by subject 70. Specifically, the switchable lens system 100c includes switchable lens devices 1 10c, HOd. The switchable lens device 1 10c can include a first switchable contact lens that can be positioned in the first eye 20 of the subject 70, and the switchable lens device HOd can include a second switchable contact lens HOd that can be positioned in second eye 30 of the subject 70. Except as otherwise described herein, the switchable lens system 100c can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein.
For example, the switchable lens system 100c can include one or more acceleration sensors that can be associated with the first eye 20 or second eye 30 and detect respective movements thereof, as described above. In an embodiment, the switchable lens system 100c can include an acceleration sensor 146c, that can be positioned remotely from the first eye 20 or second eye 30. Specifically, for example, the acceleration sensor 146c can be positioned on or mechanically connected to the head of the subject 70 (e.g., such as to detect movement of the subject 70 or movement of the subject' s head). In an embodiment, the acceleration sensor 146c can be operably coupled to the controller. For example, as described above, the controller can receive one or more signals from the acceleration sensor 146c. In some embodiments, the signals received from the acceleration sensor 146c can be processed or used by the controller to filter out noise from the acceleration sensors associated with the first eye 20 or with the second eye 30 and sensing the respective motion or acceleration thereof. In the illustrated embodiment, the acceleration sensor 146c is shown as positioned between the first and second eyes 20, 30 of the subject 70. For example, the acceleration sensor 146c can be implanted under the skin of the subject 70 (e.g., near the nose of the subject 70). It should be appreciated, however, that the acceleration sensor 146c can be located at any suitable location (e.g., as described above).
Also, as mentioned above, the controller or one or more portions thereof can be located at any number of suitable locations. For example, one or more portions of the controller can be included in a personal electronic device (e.g., the portable electronic device can include an acceleration sensor or can receive one or more signals from one or more acceleration sensors, such as from the acceleration sensor 146a). Moreover, the acceleration sensor 146c can be operably connected to the controller with any number of suitable connections (e.g., hardwired or wireless).
In an embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, a switchable lens device HOe can include or can be coupled to a communication device 200 (e.g., at least one receiver, transmitter, transceiver, or combinations thereof) that can receive data or instructions related to modification of the focal length(s) of one or more switchable lenses of the switchable lens device 1 lOe. As described above, a switchable lens system can include the controller 130e (e.g., the controller 130e can receive one or more signals and can determine vergence rotation of the eye and/or suitable focal length for the switchable lenses of the switchable lens device HOe). In an embodiment, the controller 130e can include I/O interface 220, processor 230, and memory 240 operably coupled together. In an embodiment, the controller 130e can include a database 250 (e.g., the database 340 and can have data stored in a storage memory of the controller 130e). For example, the controller 130e can store one or more parameters in the database 340 (e.g., the controller 130e can store training or tuning data in the database 340).
In an embodiment, a communication device 210 (e.g., at least one receiver, transmitter, transceiver, or combinations thereof) can be operably coupled to the controller 130e and/or integrated therewith. For example, the communication device 210 can be operably coupled to the communication device 200 (e.g., via wired or wireless connection), such that the switchable lens device 1 lOe and the controller 130e can transmit and receive data from one another. In an embodiment, display 260 and/or input device 270 (e.g., physical or virtual keyboard, microphone, etc.) can be operably coupled to the controller 130e and/or integrated therewith. For example, a user (e.g., a subject using and/or wearing the switchable lens device HOe) can enter input and/or data into the controller 130e, as described herein. Moreover, it should be appreciated that the controller 130e can be operably coupled to and/or incorporated with any number of suitable devices, such as personal electronic devices (e.g., personal computers, smart phones, tablets, etc.) and/or any other computing and/or input devices. It should be appreciated that any of the systems described herein (e.g., multi-focus lens systems, IOL systems, etc.) can have a similar or the same configuration as the system described above and illustrated in FIG. 7.
Embodiments disclosed herein are directed to switchable lens devices and systems, such as IOL devices and IOL systems, and methods that include controlling the switching of the switchable lenses. For example, as described below in more detail, the switchable lenses can have multiple optical settings and can be switched from one optical setting to another (e.g., responsive to one or more switching signals from a controller). In an embodiment, the controller can receive one or more inputs from a user and can switch or direct switching of one or more switchable lenses. For example, the controller can automatically (e.g., without a command from the user or responsive to a signal from one or more sensors detecting a non-command input, event, or condition) switch the switchable lens from a first optical setting to a second optical setting, and can switch back to the first optical setting, from the second optical setting, responsive to an override command or input received from the user (e.g., from the subject wearing the switchable lens).
Generally, the automatic switching of the switchable lens or switching without a command from the subject can be performed responsive to one or more signals received at the controller and correlated to one or more indicators that a vergence between the subject's eyes has changed. As described below in more detail, the switchable lens device or system can include one or more sensors that can detect motion of subject's eyes or correlate motion of the subject's eye with change in vergence therebetween. For example, the controller can receive one or more signals from such sensors and can switch the switchable lens from a first optical setting (e.g., a first focal length) to a second optical setting (e.g., a second focal length).
In an embodiment, switching from one optical setting to another (e.g., from a first focal length to a second focal length) can include a predetermined or selected time delay therebetween. Specifically, for example, the controller can set a time for switching the switchable lenses between optical settings, as disclosed in more detail in U.S. Patent Application No. TBD, Attorney Docket No. 260577US01_999008-55, entitled "INTRAOCULAR LENS SYSTEMS AND RELATED METHODS, which is filed concurrently herewith, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference. For example, a switching time can be received as an input (e.g., from the subject) or can be calculated based on one or more algorithms or formulas and can be stored by the controller. Moreover, the controller can apply the switching time to the switching of the switchable lenses responsive to sensor input or to the switching of the switchable lenses responsive to input received from the subject (e.g., responsive to commands, such as override commands, received from the subject).
The switchable lens system can include any number of suitable sensors that can provide one or more suitable signals to the controller, which can indicate to the controller a change in vergence between the subject' s eyes. In an embodiment, the switchable lens systems disclosed herein can include one or more sensors configured to detect one or more physiological indicia of the subject. For example, the switchable lens system can include one or more sensors configured to detect glucose concentration (e.g., in the eye of the subject), eye pressure, heart rate, biological proteins present in the eye, or any other biological indicia. The one or more sensors can be operably coupled to the controller. The controller of the switchable lens system can be configured to transmit the measurements of the physical indicia to a remote source such as a computer, a cellular phone, or other electronic device. In an embodiment, the measured physical indicia may be used to determine the health of a subject or eye thereof, customize the operation of the switchable lens device to the particular subject, determine if the controller needs to be removed or adjusted, or determine if the focal adjustments of the controller are suitable for the subject. The electronic device may then transmit instructions to the controller to selectively control or otherwise adjust the functioning of the switchable lens system, such as controllably changing the focal length of the switchable lens device.
In some operating conditions, the subject may desire to have one or more of the switchable lenses switch to the previous optical setting (e.g., to the optical setting of the switchable lenses before the non-command switching described above). For example, the controller can include or can be operably coupled to one or more input devices or sensors that can detect or receive inputs from the subject (e.g., override inputs or commands, to change the current optical setting of the switchable lens to a previous optical setting). In an embodiment, the controller can be operably coupled to an audio detection device, such as a microphone (e.g., piezo microphone, laser microphone, condenser microphone, etc.). Hence, for example, the controller can receive one or more audible inputs and can correlate the audible inputs to one or more optical settings for the switchable lens(es) or to one or more switching commands. The controller can switch or direct switching of one or more switchable lenses responsive to the switching commands (e.g., switching command can be correlated to a specific optical setting for one or more of the switchable lenses).
In one or more embodiments, the controller can include or can be operably coupled to one or more motion or gesture detection sensors. For example, the sensors can detect one or more selected movements or gestures (e.g., gestures made by the subject). The controller can receive one or more signals from the motion or gesture detection sensors and can correlate subject' s gestures or movements with one or more switching commands. For example, responsive to one or more switching commands received from the subject, the controller can change one or more optical settings of one or more of the switchable lenses, as described herein.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens can be configured to switch between two or more focal lengths. FIG. 1 schematically illustrates eyes 20 and 30 of a subject focused on a first object 10 that is positioned at a first distance from the subject. In particular, when the eyes 20, 30 are focused on the first object 10, an angle between respective optical axes thereof can be at a vergence angle φι. FIG. 1 also schematically illustrates a switchable lens system 100, according to an embodiment. For example, switchable lens system 100 can include a first switchable lens device 1 10 positioned in a first eye 20 and a second switchable lens device 1 10' positioned in a second eye 30 of the subject.
Generally, the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10' can be configured to augment or correct visual deficiencies of the subject or to replace the lenses in the respective first eye 20 or second eye 30 of the subject (e.g., in cataract surgeries). It should be appreciated that, in one or more embodiments, the switchable lens system 100 can include only a single switchable lens device (e.g., the first switchable lens device 1 10 or the second switchable lens device 1 10'), which can be associated with or positioned in the first eye 20 or in the second eye 30. The switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to or set at a first optical setting, such as a first focal length.
For example, at the first focal length, the light entering the eye from the distance of the first object 10 is focused on the retina of the respective eyes 20, 30, thereby focusing the eyes 20, 30 on the first object 10. Moreover, the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to a second optical setting, such as a second focal length. When the subject focuses on another object, such as an object that is closer to the subject than the first object 10, the subject's eyes 20, 30 can tilt such as to converge, thereby changing the angle between the optical axes thereof. FIG. 2 schematically shows the subject's eyes 20, 30 focused on a second object 90, which is positioned at a second distance and closer to the subject than the first object 10 (FIG. 1). For example, when the eyes 20, 30 focus on the second object 90, the angle between the optical axes thereof can change to a second angle φ2. More specifically, as the eyes 20, 30 focus on the closer, second object 90, the eyes 20, 30 converge or in-tilt, such that the second angle φ2 defined by the respective optical axis thereof is greater than the first angle φι.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can be switched to the second focal length, which can be shorter than the first focal length. The switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' can include one or more sensors that can sense or detect a one or more instructions or inputs (e.g., one or more inputs from the subject) and can correlate the one or more inputs from the subject to a change in vergence rotation between the eyes 20, 30 (e.g., convergence to focus on a closer object or divergence to focus on a farther object) or to a request or command to change one or more optical settings of the switchable lens devices 1 10 or 1 10' (e.g., to change a focal length, to change visible-light transmittance, to change focal spot, etc.).
Generally, switchable lenses can have any number of optical settings, and the controller can directly or indirectly select at least one of the optical settings for the switchable lens. Hence, for example, the switchable lens devices (e.g., the switchable lens device 1 10 or switchable lens device 1 10') can be configured for switching among any suitable number of optical settings, as described below in more detail. In one or more embodiments, the switchable lens devices described herein may have optical settings with a single optical parameter (e.g., focal length, light transmittance, etc.) or multiple optical parameters.
FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate the switchable lens device 1 10, according to an embodiment. FIG. 8A is a top view of the switchable lens device 1 10 and FIG. 8B is a side view of the switchable lens device 1 10. It should be appreciated, however, that the switchable lens 1 10' (FIGS. 8A-8B) can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10. Generally, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a switchable lens 1 1 1 and haptics 1 12 connected to or integrated with the switchable lens 1 1 1. In an embodiment, the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on or secured to one or more structures in the eye, thereby positioning or securing the switchable lens device 1 10 in the eye.
For example, the haptics 1 12 can be positioned on the ciliary body or muscles or in or on the capsular bag of the natural lens of the eye. The switchable lens 1 1 1 can be located laterally in the center of the eye with the haptics 1 12 extending laterally therefrom. As mentioned above, the switchable lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10 can be switched between two or more optical settings (e.g., two or more focal lengths, to focus light entering the eye from a selected distance on the retina of the eye), thereby augmenting or correcting the vision of the subject.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be substantially fixed within the eye (e.g., switchable lens device can be substantially immobile relative to the optical axis of the eye). As such, for example, movement of the eye 20 can result in a corresponding movement of the switchable lens device 1 10. In particular, as the eye 20 tilts or pivots in the eye socket, the switchable lens device 1 10 can correspondingly tilt or pivot together with the eye. Furthermore, one, some, or all of the elements or components of the switchable lens device 1 10 can have a predetermined orientation relative to the eye or relative to the optical axis thereof, as described below in more detail.
In an embodiment, a controller 130 that can include control electrical circuitry can be operably coupled to the switchable lens 1 1 1 and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 between two or more optical settings (e.g., between two or more focal lengths). In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, a controller 130 can be mounted on, embedded in, or otherwise mechanically connected to the haptics 1 12 (e.g., as schematically shown in FIG. 8B). Additionally or alternatively, the controller 130 can be mounted on, embedded in, or otherwise mechanically connected to the switchable lens 1 1 1 or any other suitable portion of the switchable lens device 1 10.
As described above, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include one or more sensors that can detect or sense inputs, events, or conditions that can be related to or associated with the change of vergence between the eyes of the subject (e.g., sensors that can detect movement or direction of movement of the first or second eye of the subject). In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be operably coupled to and can receive detection outputs from a field sensor 190 that can be operably (e.g., mechanically) coupled to one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., to the haptics 1 12). Generally, the field sensor 190 can include a single or multiple sensors that can detect presence or changes in a magnetic field. For example, the field sensor 190 can move together with the subject's eye and can detect a change in an established identifiable field (e.g., a magnetic field that can be established at a suitable location relative to the field sensor 190 or relative to the switchable lens device). Additionally or alternatively, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include a field source 150 that can establish an identifiable field. Another field sensor (e.g., located externally to the switchable lens device 1 10) can detect the change in the field as the field source 150 moves together with the switchable lens device 1 10 that can move together with the eye of the subject. Field sources, field sensors, and switchable device and controller configurations that are suitable for determining the change in vergence between the first and second eyes of the subject (e.g., for switching the switchable lens from the first optical setting to the second optical setting, such as from the first focal length to the second focal length) are disclosed in more detail in U. S. Patent Application No. 19/807,719, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include an acceleration sensor 191 that can be operably coupled to the controller 130. Generally, the acceleration sensor 191 can also include a single accelerometer, gyroscope, etc., or multiple accelerometers, gyroscopes, etc., (e.g., two or more of which can be arranged in an array). For example, the acceleration sensor 191 can move together with the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., together with the eye of the subject), and the controller 130 can receive one or more signals from the acceleration sensor 191, which can be related to the movement detected by the acceleration sensors. Moreover, based at least partially on the signals received from the acceleration sensor 191, the controller 130 can determine the change in vergence between the subject's first and second eyes, as described in more detail in U. S. Patent Application No. 15/267,526, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference. In an embodiment, the switchable lens device can include a physiological characteristic sensor (not shown). For example, physiological characteristic sensor can detect one or more physiological characteristics or changes therein, such as glucose concentration (e.g., in the eye of the subject), eye pressure, heart rate, biological proteins present in the eye, or any other biological indicia. In an embodiment, the controller 130 can determine one or more focus-related characteristics based on the activity of the subject's ciliary muscles. For example, the physiological characteristic sensor can detect activity of the ciliary muscle(s) of the subject and can generate one or more signals responsive thereto (e.g., the signal(s) generated by the physiological sensor(s) can be related to the change in vergence between the eyes of the subject). The physiological characteristic sensor can be operably coupled to the controller 130, and the controller 130 can receive one or more signals from the physiological characteristic sensor and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 based at least partially on one or more signals received from the physiological characteristic sensor.
It should be appreciated that the switchable lens device 1 10 can include one, some, or all of the sensors described above, which can be operably coupled to the controller 130 and can send one or more signals thereto; the controller 130 can determine or estimate change in vergence between the subject's eyes based at least partially on the signals received from such sensors. Moreover, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include one or more additional or alternative sensors (e.g., as described below in more detail) that can be operably coupled to the controller 130, and based on signals from which the controller 130 can determine or estimate change in vergence between the subject's eyes. As described above, under some operating conditions or in some instances, the subject may desire to override the optical setting selected by or switched to by the controller 130 or to switch to a different optical setting than the optical setting selected by or switched to by the controller 130 (e.g., responsive to controller 130 making the determination of change in vergence). For example, the switchable lens device 1 10 can detect or receive one or more inputs from the subject, which can indicate or can be correlated to a command for switching to a previous optical setting. In an embodiment, as described below in more detail, the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., the controller 130 of the switchable lens device 1 10) can receive audible or gesture inputs and correlate the inputs to one or more switching or override commands.
In an embodiment, the controller 130 can receive a detection output from an input sensor 192. For example, the detection output can be related or can correspond to one or more commands or selections for one or more optical settings (e.g., for a single optical setting for one or more switchable lenses or for multiple optical settings for two or more switchable lenses). At least partially based on the received detection output, the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a selected or predetermined optical setting, such as a previous optical setting. For example, the controller 130 can correlate the signals received from the input sensor 192 to one or more override commands or optical settings (e.g., default optical settings). As described herein, the input sensor 192 can detect audible input or commands provided by the subject. For example, the subject can provide an audible command that can be detected by the input sensor 192, and, based at least partially on the signals received from the input sensor 192, which can be related to the audible command provided by the subject, the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a selected optical setting. Under some operating conditions, the commands provided by the subject can override the optical that was previously determined or selected by the controller 130 (e.g., as mentioned above, the controller 130 can select an optical setting or switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a selected optical setting based at least partially on one or more non-command inputs, events, or conditions determined by one or more sensors operably coupled to the controller 130).
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be configured to switch between two or more discrete optical settings. For example, the switchable lens device 1 10 can have set or specific focal lengths to which the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be switched (e.g., a first focal length for viewing nearby objects and a second focal length for viewing objects at a distance). Similarly, the switchable lens device 1 10 can be switched between two or more discrete settings for the visible-light transmittance through the switchable lens 1 1 1.
It should be appreciated that any optical setting may involve at least one optical parameter, such as focal length, focal or optical power (e.g., magnification), light transmission, focal position, etc. In some embodiments, at least one optical setting includes multiple optical parameters. In an embodiment, the controller 130 can store (directly or indirectly (e.g., the controller 130 can be operably coupled to a storage)) multiple optical settings and corresponding optical parameters thereof. Moreover, the controller 130 can store multiple optical settings and corresponding switching commands (e.g., audible commands or inputs) for switching to each optical setting. For example, the controller 130 can include or can be operably coupled to a table that correlated multiple optical settings with corresponding optical parameters and switching commands (e.g., commands that can be received from the subject) or signals (e.g., signals that can be received from the input sensor 192). In an embodiment, the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 from a first focal length to a second focal length (e.g., responsive to a command received from the subject or responsive to a non-command input). In an embodiment, at the first focal length, the switchable lens 1 1 1 can have a different focal or optical power than at the second focal length. Moreover, the subject can provide input or command (e.g., that can be detected by the input sensor 192), and the controller 130 can change the focal length or the optical power of the switchable lens 1 1 1 responsive to the command received from the subject (e.g., overriding previously selected focal length or optical power of the switchable lens 1 1 1, as may be selected by the controller 130 responsive to a non-command input).
In an embodiment, the input sensor 192 can detect one or more inputs that can be correlated to a selection of at least one optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1. For example, as described below in more detail, responsive to the signal(s) received from the input sensor 192, the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a selected optical settings (e.g., the controller 130 can generate one or more switching signals that can be based on or responsive to the signal(s) received from the input sensor 192).
In an embodiment, the input sensor 192 can include one or more audio or sounds sensors or detectors (e.g., a microphone). For example, the input sensor 192 can detect an audio input or command, and the controller 130 can receive one or more signals from the input sensor 192, which can correspond to the audio input(s) detected by the input sensor 192. Moreover, the controller 130 can correlate the audio input(s) detected by the input sensor 192 or the signals received from the input sensor 192 to one or more switching commands or to one or more optical settings for the switchable lens 1 1 1. For example, the subject wearing or using the switchable lens device 1 10 can provide an audible command requesting that the switchable lens device 1 10 switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 from a first optical setting to a second optical setting, or vice versa. The input sensor 192 can detect the audible command provided by the subject, and responsive to the detection of the audible command at the input sensor 192, the controller 130 can receive one or more signals from the input sensor 192. Moreover, as discussed above, the controller 130 can correlate the one or more signals received from the input sensor 192 to one or more optical settings corresponding thereto and requested by the subject. Responsive to the audible command (e.g., from the subject), the controller 130 also can switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 from the first optical setting to the second optical setting, from the second optical setting to a third optical setting, and so on, by switching or directing the switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to the optical setting that corresponds to the command detected by the input sensor 192.
In an embodiment, the controller 130 can correlate an audible command or input (e.g., from the subject) with an optical setting for the switchable lens 11 1. For example, an audible command can be a voice command. Hence, in an embodiment, the controller 130 can correlate verbal audible commands or sounds, such as subject speaking out loud a phrase, a number, a parameter, etc., with a selected optical setting. In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be programmed or configured to filter out voice commands from persons other than the subject. For example, the controller 130 can be configured or programmed to distinguish the voice of the subject from persons other than the subject.
Additionally or alternatively, audible commands can include non-verbal commands. Generally, the non-verbal commands can include any suitable or repeatable sound or noise that can be associated with a specific optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1. For example, suitable non-verbal commands can include clacking of teeth, clapping, clicking, etc. The controller 130 can be configured to correlate non-verbal commands to specific or corresponding optical settings. For example, the subject can train the controller 130 to correlate a clicking sound with a first optical setting, and clacking of teeth with a second optical setting.
In an embodiment, a command for switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a suitable or selected optical setting can involve a series, a sequence, or a pattern of non-verbal commands or sounds. For example, a selected number of repeated claps, clicks, combinations thereof, etc., can be correlated with a selection for a specific optical setting. In an embodiment, the selected number of non-verbal or repeated commands must be provided by the subject within a selected time period. For example, the controller 130 can filter out verbal or non-verbal inputs (or signals received from the input sensor 192, which correspond to the verbal and non-verbal inputs) that do not correspond to a command input (e.g., verbal or non-verbal inputs that do not include or correspond to a selected sound, selected number of repeats of the sound(s) time period within which the sound(s) were repeated, etc.). For example, the controller 130 can be configured to correlate the input received from the subject or from the input sensor 192 with selected period of time. Moreover, the selected period of time can be the time period from the time of switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., to a selected setting based on non-command related signal(s) received from one or more sensors) to the time of receiving suitable input from the input sensor 192 (e.g., the subject' s input, such as audible input, or command must be received at the controller 130 within a selected period of time after the controller 130 switched or directed switching of the switchable lens, such as responsive to one or more non-command signals or inputs that can be received from one or more sensors). In other embodiments, the selected period of time can be the time period from the time of switching between an enabled state for sensor-based switching and a disabled state for sensor-based switching, to the time of receiving suitable input from the input sensor 192 (e.g., the subject' s input, such as audible input, or command must be received at the controller 130 within a selected period of time after the controller 130 switched or directed switching between an enabled and a disabled state for sensor-based switching.
Hence, for example, the controller 130 can filter out signals received from the input sensor 192, which are received at the controller 130 outside of the selected time period or which do not correspond to a command for switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 from one optical setting to another. It should be appreciated that, as described below in more detail, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include any number of suitable sensors or detectors that can detect any number of inputs (e.g., inputs from the subject using the switchable lens device 110); the sensors or detectors can generate one or more signals responsive to such inputs, and the signals can be correlated by the controller 130 to one or more optical settings. As mentioned above, the optical settings for the switchable lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10 can involve any number of suitable optical properties. For example, the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be switchable between two or more focal lengths. In an embodiment, the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be configured to switch between at least two different optical settings (e.g., between two different focal lengths) responsive to one or more electrical inputs. Hence, for example, the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 between two or more optical settings by generating a suitable electrical signal. That is, the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be an electrically-modifiable diffractive lens, such as the electrically-modifiable lenses described in more detail in U. S. Application No. 19/807,673, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference. Additionally or alternatively, the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be liquid crystal lens (e.g., a liquid crystal lens with an electrically tunable focal length). In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be configured to compare or correlate the inputs from the subject or the signals received from the input sensor 192 to one or more approved inputs (e.g., the controller 130 can receive or include one or more approved inputs that can be stored in the controller 130, such as in a table or database). For example, the approved inputs can correspond to one or more optical settings (e.g., first, second, etc., optical settings can be correlated to corresponding first, second, etc., approved inputs). In an embodiment, the controller 130 can distinguish inputs from the subject that correspond to approved inputs from other inputs that do not correspond to approved inputs (e.g., to differentiate between a command provided by the subject to switch to an optical setting, such as a previous optical setting, and a non-command sound or gesture made by the subject). Generally, approved inputs may be in any suitable form (e.g., the controller 130 can differentiate a first signal from the input sensor 192, which can be correlated to an approved input, from a second signal from the input sensor 192, which does not correlate to an approved input).
In an embodiment, one or more approved inputs can be based on one or more environmental conditions or settings (e.g., of the subject or of the switchable lens device 1 10). For example, one or more sensors or detectors of the switchable lens device 1 10 (e.g., the acceleration sensor 191, physiological characteristics sensor, etc.) can detect one or more environmental conditions. Generally, environmental conditions can include any suitable condition that can facilitate correcting a potentially inaccurate determination of an optical setting by the controller 130. For example, environmental conditions can include a determination of the speed of movement of the subject, which can be correlated to the location of the subject (e.g., standing, walking, running, driving, flying, etc.). For example, the controller 130 can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 11 responsive to one or more non-command signals from one or more sensors (e.g., responsive to one or more signals received from the field sensor 190), where the second focal length focuses the switchable lens 1 1 1 on an object closer that at the first focal length. The subject can provide one or more audible or gesture inputs (as described herein) to switch to the first focal length or to another focal length. For example, an input from the subject can be correlated by the controller 130 to the first focal length and to the second focal length (e.g., due to the noise, such as in an audible input). The controller 130 can correlate the input or distinguish the signal based on one or more environmental conditions (e.g., where the controller 130 determines that the subject is driving, the controller 130 can favor or weigh heavier the probability that the input received from the subject corresponds to the first focal length, focusing on the farther object).
In an embodiment, the subject may request the controller 130 to switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a first optical setting, under which the switchable lens 1 1 1 can have a first position relative to the haptics 1 12, a first focal length, and a first visible-light- transmittance setting. As mentioned above, any number of suitable commands or inputs (e.g., audible input, gesture inputs (described below), etc.) can be provided to the controller 130 (e.g., via the detection at the input sensor 192, which the subject can input the switching command or request to change from one optical setting to another). In an embodiment, the input(s) or commands received from the subject can include information corresponding to an optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., the optical setting that was set for the switchable lens 1 1 1 before the switchable lens 1 1 1 was switched, such as responsive to one or more non-command signals received by the controller 130 from one or more sensors). For example, the subject may speak a phrase (e.g., "first setting") that can be detected by the input sensor 192, and, responsive to the signals received from the input sensor 192, the controller 130 can generate a switching signal, switch, or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 to the selected or corresponding optical setting.
Additionally or alternatively, the audible input or spoken command can refer or correspond to a previous optical setting (e.g., optical setting that was set for the switchable lens 1 1 1 before the change by the controller 130, such as before the change responsive non-command input, event, or condition). For example, the controller 130 can correlate one or more signals received from the input sensor 192 detecting the subject speaking a suitable word or phrase (e.g., "go back") to one or more previously set optical settings. For example, the controller 130 can store one or more previous optical settings that were set for the switchable lens 1 1 1 and can retrieve the store optical setting(s) responsive to the corresponding commands received from the subject or signals received from the input sensor 192. Moreover, in an embodiment, the controller 130 can switch or direct switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 to the corresponding selected or retrieved optical setting (e.g., corresponding to the command received from the subject).
As described above and further described below, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include any number of suitable sensors (e.g., field sensor 190, acceleration sensor 191, video detector, etc.) that can detect any number of non-command inputs, events, or conditions and provide corresponding signals to the controller 130 for determining one or more suitable optical settings for the switchable lens 1 1 1. In an embodiment, the controller 130 can receive one or more inputs or commands from the subject (e.g., audible commands as described above) that the controller 130 can correlate to a selection of one or more sensors or inputs, events, or conditions detected thereby that the controller 130 can use or accept for determining an optical setting (e.g., focal length) for the switchable lens 1 1 1. For example, responsive to one or more commands or inputs received from the subject, the controller 130 can block or ignore signals from one or more sensors (e.g., the controller 130 can ignore signals received from the acceleration sensor 191 and accept signals received from the field sensor 190 for determining the focal length for the switchable lens 1 1 1).
In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be configured or programmed according to a plurality of algorithms that can be selected by the controller 130 for determining a suitable optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1. Generally, a selected algorithm for determining the suitable optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1 can involve any number of steps or operations that can be performed by the controller 130, and which can involve or require input or signals from any number of suitable input sources (e.g., sensors) and any number of computational or correlative operations therewith (e.g., mathematical operations, operation correlating the input(s) or signal(s) to one or more stored values, etc.). In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be programmed or configured to determine the suitable optical setting according to any number of selectable algorithms (e.g., that can be selected by the subject). For example, the controller 130 can base the determination of the optical setting at least partially on the environmental conditions detected by one or more sensors. Additionally or alternatively, the controller 130 can receive one or more inputs or commands from the subject, indicating to select a specific algorithm, according to which the controller 130 can determine or switch to an optical setting (e.g., the controller 130 can process one or more inputs from sensor(s) based on the selected algorithm(s)).
In an embodiment, a first algorithm can include a first set of operations that can require a first set of inputs, and a second algorithm can include a second set of operations that can require a second set of inputs. For example, the second set of inputs can be different than the first set of inputs. For example, the first set of inputs can include signals from an acceleration sensor and from a field sensor, and the second set of inputs can include signals only from the field sensor (e.g., the signals from the acceleration sensor may be disregarded when the controller 130 determined the optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1 based on the second algorithm).
In an embodiment, the subject can provide one or more audible or gesture inputs (e.g., as described herein) that can be detected by the input sensor 192, which can be correlated by the controller 130 to one or more command. For example, based on the one or more commands from the subject, the controller 130 can select a suitable algorithm (e.g., the command can include an algorithm selection or one or more parameters that can be correlated by the controller 130 to a suitable algorithm selection). Likewise, based on the command(s) received from the subject, the controller 130 can switch from basing the determination of the optical setting on one algorithm to another (e.g., switch from using the first algorithm to using the second algorithm or vice versa). Moreover, responsive to the command received from the subject, the controller 130 can switch the optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 1 (as described herein) and switch from one algorithm to another (e.g., based on the same command or input received from the subject).
In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be configured to stop sensor-based switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., to stop switching the switchable lens 1 11 according to one or more algorithms described herein). For example, the controller 130 can be configured to stop sensor-based switching of the switchable lens 11 1 responsive to one or more inputs or commands received from the subject. Furthermore, the controller 130 can be configured to resume sensor-based switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., responsive to one or more additional or alternative inputs or commands received from the subject, responsive to one or more detected conditions or events, etc.). For example, the controller 130 can switch between an enabled state for sensor-based switching and a disabled state for sensor-based switching. Hence, when a state setting is set to an enabled state, the controller 130 can be configured to direct sensor-based switching an optical setting of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting or from the second optical setting to the first optical setting responsive to the one or more sensor signals. Conversely, for example, when the state setting is set to a disabled state, for example, the controller can maintain the optical setting unchanged.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include at least one output device 170. For example, the output device 170 can provide an indication to the subject that the controller 130 received an input from the subject or accepted, or executed a command for switching from one optical setting to another (e.g., a command that corresponds to the input received from the subject). In an embodiment, the controller 130 can be operably coupled to the output device 170 and can send one or more signals thereto, indicating that the controller 130 has received one or more signals from the input sensor 192, which correspond to at least one command for switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 from one optical setting to another. For example, responsive to the signal(s) received (directly or indirectly) from the controller 130, the output device 170 can generate an output that is identifiable by the subject.
In an embodiment, the output device 170 can include a speaker that can generate an audible feedback to the subject. For example, the speaker can produce one or more selected non-verbal sounds, such as beeping, clicking, etc., or one or more selected verbal sounds, such as a spoken word or phrase (e.g., "selection accepted"). It should be appreciated, however, that the output device 170 can include any number of output devices suitable for providing feedback to the subject, which is suitably or sufficiently identifiable by the subject. In an embodiment, the output device 170 can include a haptic feedback generator.
For example, the output device 170 can vibrate, pulse, etc., in a manner that can be detected or identified by the subject. Moreover, a selected combination or pattern of haptic feedback can provide the subject with a specific feedback or identification, which can indicate to the subject that the controller 130 received an input from the subject or accepted, or executed a command for switching from one optical setting to another. For example, a short pulse can indicate that the subject's command was accepted by the controller 130, and a longer pulse can indicate that the subject' s command was not accepted by the controller 130. Additionally or alternatively, the output device 170 can include a visible indicator. For example, the output device 170 can include a visible indicator. For example, the visible indicator can include lights of one or more selected wavelengths. In an embodiment, the light(s) can be produced by a light generator (e.g., LED) that can generate feedback of suitable color, intensity, pattern (e.g., Morse code), etc., to provide suitable feedback to the subject.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 110 can include a communication device 160 (e.g., the controller 130 can be operably coupled to the communication device 160). The communication device 160 can be mounted on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, the communication device 160 can be embedded in or mechanically connected to the haptics 1 12 or the switchable lens 1 1 1 of the switchable lens device 1 10.
In an embodiment, the communication device 160 can be wireless (e.g., the communication device 160 can be a transmitter or a transceiver) or wired. For example, a wireless (e.g., RF -based or US-based) connection can be established between the communication device 160 and another or additional communication device. Alternatively, the communication device 160 and another communication device can have a wired connection therebetween. For example, an electrical conductor connecting the communication device 160 and another communication device can be implanted in or near the eyes of the subject. In any embodiment, the communication device 160 can be operably coupled to the additional communication device, such as to send data therebetween.
In an embodiment, the controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, or communication device 160 can be operably coupled or connected to a power source. For example, the power source can include a rechargeable energy storage device or battery (not shown) that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. The battery can be wirelessly recharged (e.g., a wireless or inductive charger can recharge the battery). In an embodiment, the battery can be operably connected to a photovoltaic cell that can be mounted on or embedded in the switchable lens device 1 10. Alternatively or additionally, the battery can be operably connected or coupled to a charge port that can be configured to accept a charging device. In any event, the power source can power one or more of the controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, or communication device 160.
In an embodiment, the power source may include a parasitic power device, such as an induction coil, one or more photocells, thermoelectric device, or any other device configured to harvest energy from a subject or the environment. For example, the induction coil can include a channel having a magnet therein, the channel passing the induction coil upon movement of the subject (e.g., eye-movement or blinking). In an embodiment, an induction coil can be disposed in the eye of a subject (e.g., in or adjacent to the switchable lens) and a corresponding magnet may be positioned on an adjacent part of the subject (e.g., an eyelid or bridge of the nose) whereby movement of the eye or eyelid can cause a current in the induction coil.
As described above, the switchable lens system can include a single switchable lens device or multiple switchable lens devices (e.g., a switchable lens device can be located in one or in both eyes of the subject). Generally, the switchable lens devices of the switchable lens system can be similar to or the same as the switchable lens device 1 10. It should be appreciated, however, that any of the switchable lens devices included in the switchable lens systems described herein can include or can be operably coupled to any number of controllers, input sensors, output devices, or combinations thereof, which can be similar to or the same as the controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, and communication device 160.
While the switchable lens device 1 10 is described as including the controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, and communication device 160, configurations of the switchable lens device 110 can vary from one embodiment to the next. For example, the switchable lens device 1 10 can include the switchable lens 1 1 1 , and the controller 130, input sensor 192, or output device 170 can be positioned externally to the switchable lens device 1 10. For example, the controller 130, input sensor 192, or output device 170 can be included in an external device, such as a personal electronic device (e.g., subject's smart phone). Moreover, as described above, the subject can wear switchable lens devices in both eyes. Hence, for example, a first switchable lens device can include the switchable lens 1 1 1, controller 130, input sensor 192, output device 170, communication device 160, or any combination thereof, while the second switchable lens device can include a switchable lens and a communication device operably coupled to the communication device 160 and configured received switching signals therefrom (e.g., the controller 130 can generate switching signals or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 1 and of a second switchable lens).
In the illustrated embodiment, the switchable lens 1 1 1 is an intraocular lens. It should be appreciated, however, that the switchable lens 1 1 1 can be any other suitable lens, as described below in more detail. For example, the switchable lens can be included in or can form a part of a contact lens that can be worn by the subject. Additionally or alternatively, the switchable lens can be included in one or more devices positionable externally to the subject' s eye. As described below in more detail, for example, the switchable lenses can be included in spectacles, goggles, shields, etc.
Moreover, the input sensor 192 can include any number of sensors suitable for detecting subject' s input. For example, the input sensor 192 can include one or more photocells that can detect the subject's use of eye blinking as an input signal. For example, as described below in more detail, the input sensor 192 can include one or more motion sensors (e.g., accelerometers) that can detect movements or gestures of the subject (e.g., movements of subject' s head) that can be made by the subject as an input of a command to the controller 130. In an embodiment, the controller 130 can correlate one or more signals received from accelerometer(s) to one or more commands for switching the switchable lens 1 1 1 (e.g., as described above in connection with audible commands). For example, a sequence of nods, turns, etc., of subject' s head can be detected by the input sensor 192, and responsive to such detection, the controller 130 can switch the switchable lens 1 1 1 to a corresponding optical setting.
Moreover, the controller 130 can receive a one or more inputs from one or more sensors configured to detect one or more physiological characteristics sensor, etc. The detection input(s) from the sensor(s) can be related or correspond to the vergence rotation between the subject's eyes. At least partially based on the received output(s), the controller 130 can switch the lens 1 1 1 to a suitable or predetermined focal length. For example, the controller 130 can be operably coupled to and can receive input(s) from the physiological characteristic sensor(s) that can be positioned on or embedded in one or more portions of the switchable lens device 1 10.
In the illustrated embodiment, controller 130 is mechanically coupled or connected to the switchable lens device 1 10. Similarly, the input sensor 192 and output device 170 are physically positioned on or included in the switchable lens device 1 10. Again, however, controllers, input sensors, output devices, or combinations thereof, can be positioned remotely of the switchable lens device, at any number of suitable locations or positions. FIG. 9 illustrates a switchable lens system 100a, according to an embodiment. The switchable lens system 100a can include switchable lens device 1 10a and switchable lens device 1 10a', which can be positioned in the eyes 20 and 30, respectively, of the subject 70. Except as otherwise described herein, the switchable lens device 1 10a and switchable lens device 1 10a' and their respective elements and components can be similar to or the same as any other switchable lens device described herein and their elements and components.
As mentioned above, the switchable lens device 1 10a or the switchable lens device 1 10a' can include respective switchable lenses that can be controlled by a single controller or each of which can be controlled by a separate controller. For example, the switchable lens system 100a can include a controller that can receive signals from any number of suitable sensors, and the received signals can be related to the change in vergence (e.g., as described above), such that the controller can determine one or more optical settings for the switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10a' or can switch or direct switching of the switchable lenses (of the respective switchable lens devices 1 10a, 1 10a') responsive to such signals. Furthermore, the switchable lens device 1 10a or the switchable lens device 1 10a' can include fewer elements or components than the switchable lens device 110 (FIGS. 8A- 8B)
In an embodiment, the switchable lens system 100a can include an input sensor 192a that can be positioned externally to the switchable lens device 1 10a and to the switchable lens device 1 10a' . In the illustrated embodiment, the input sensor 192a is positioned between the eyes 20, 30 of the subject 70 (e.g., the input sensor 192a can be implanted under the skin of the subject 70). It should be appreciated that the input sensor 192a can be positioned at any number of suitable locations. Moreover, the input sensor 192a can be operably coupled to one or more controllers of the switchable lens system 100a; the controller(s) can receive one or more signals from the input sensor 192a (e.g., as described above) and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lenses of the switchable lens device 1 10a or switchable lens device 1 10a' . Additionally or alternatively, any other element or component of the switchable lens device 1 10a or switchable lens device 110a' can be positioned externally thereto.
As mentioned above, switchable lenses can be included in one or more devices positionable externally to the eyes of the subject. Moreover, any of the elements or components described above in connection with the switchable lens can be included in or mechanically connected to the switchable lens device that is positionable externally to the subject's eyes (e.g., in spectacles). FIG. 10 illustrates a switchable lens system 100b, according to an embodiment. Specifically, the switchable lens system 100b is configured as spectacles. The switchable lens system 100c can include switchable lens device 1 10b that includes switchable lens 1 1 1b and switchable lens 1 1 1b' secured in a frame 1 18B, with the switchable lens 1 1 1b and switchable lens 1 1 lb' positionable in front of respective eyes 20, 30 of the subject. Except as otherwise described herein, the switchable lens device 1 10b and its elements and components can be similar to or the same as any other switchable lens device described herein and their elements and components. For example, the switchable lens system 100b can include controller 130b and input sensor 192b that can be similar to or the same as the controller 130 and input sensor 192 of the switchable lens device 1 10 (FIGS. 8A-8B). Moreover, the switchable lens system 100b can include an output device 170b. For example, the output device 170b can produce audible signals (e.g., selected sounds, speech-like sounds, etc.), visually identifiable signals (e.g., lights, images, etc.), or tactile signals (e.g., vibrations). For example, the output device 170b can be positioned near the eye 20, such that the signals from the output device 170b are visible to the eye 20. In an embodiment, the output device 170c can be positioned on or near the switchable lens 1 1 1b (e.g., the light emitted from the output device 170b can be at least partially transmitted through the switchable lens 1 1 lb). Hence, the signals from the output device 170b can be received by the subject.
In the illustrated embodiment, the controller 130b and input sensor 192b can be included in or mechanically connected to the frame 1 18B of the spectacles of the switchable lens system 100b. It should be appreciated, however, that the controller 130b, input sensor 192b, or output device 170b can be positioned on any portion of the switchable lens device 110b (e.g., on any portion of the frame 1 18B, on the switchable lens 1 1 1b, on the switchable lens 1 1 1b', etc.). Additionally or alternatively, the controller 130b, input sensor 192b, or output device 170b can be positioned externally to the switchable lens device 1 10b (e.g., the controller 130b, input sensor 192b, or output device 170b can be included in or attached to a device that can be configured to be carried by the subject, such as a smart phone).
As described above, the switchable lens system or switchable lens device can receive one or more non-audible inputs, such as gestures from the subject and can switch to a selected or predetermined optical setting, such as to the previously set optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 1b or 1 1 1b' . For example, the switchable lens system or switchable lens device can include one or more detectors configured to receive or detect gestures provided by the subject. FIGS. 11A-11B illustrate a switchable lens system 100c, according to an embodiment. Except as described there, the switchable lens system 100c and its elements and components can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein and their corresponding elements and components.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens system 100c can include a switchable lens device 1 10c that is configured as spectacles. The switchable lens device 1 10c can include a controller 130c and communication device 160c that can be similar to or the same as the controller 130 and communication device 160 (FIGS. 8A-8B). In an embodiment, the switchable lens system 100c can include one or more sensors 190c or one or more sensors 190c' that can be input sensors or any number of suitable sensors configured to detect one or more gestures of the subject 70. For example, the input sensors 190c or input sensors 190c' can include or comprise one or more cameras configured to capture within their respective fields-of-view one or more portions of the body of the subject 70. In an embodiment, the cameras of the sensors 190c can have a field-of-view 195c and the cameras of the sensors 190c' can have a field-of-view 195c' . In an embodiment, the field- of-view 195c can be suitably sized and configured to capture movement of the eye 20 and the field-of-view 195' can be suitably sized and configured to capture movement of the eye 30.
In an embodiment, as described above, the controller 130c can be operably coupled to the sensors 190c or to the sensors 190c' and can receive signals therefrom. For example, signals received at the controller 130c from the input sensors 190c or input sensors 190c' can be related by the controller 130c to movement of one or more portions the eye 20 or eye 30 of the subject 70. Hence, in an embodiment, the controller 130 can be configured to determine change in vergence between the eyes based at least partially on the detected movement thereof, as described in more detail in U. S. Patent Application No. 15/079,606 the entire content of which is incorporated herein by this reference.
In an embodiment, the controller 130c can determine one or more focus-related characteristics based on the change in size of the pupil of the subject's eye. In an embodiment, the switchable lens system 100c or switchable lens device 1 10c can include one or more sensors (e.g., sensors 190c, 190c') that can be positioned and configured to determine the size of the pupil(s) of the respective eyes of the subject or change in the size of the pupil(s). For example, the controller 130c can be configured to correlate the change in size of the pupil (e.g., based on the signals received from the sensors 190c, 190c') to a change in vergence between the eyes of the subject (e.g., as the subject attempts to change the focus of the eyes from a closer object to a farther object or vice versa). As described above, responsive to the determined change in vergence between the eyes, the controller 130c can change or direct changing of one or more optical settings of the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' (e.g., change focal length(s) of the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 lc').
In an embodiment, the controller 130c can determine one or more focus-related characteristics based at least partially on the light reflection from the retina (or retinae) of the subject's eye(s). Moreover, the controller 130c can determine one or more focus- related characteristics based at least partially on the light characteristics surrounding the subject (e.g., based at least partially on the environment proximate to the subject and the ambient illumination level thereof). For example, the sensors 190c or 190c' can detect the light reflected from subject' s retinae or the level of ambient illumination and can generate one or more signals related thereto, which can be received at the controller 130c. For example, at least partially based on the signals, the controller 130c can determine the change in vergence between the eyes of the subject and can change or direct changing of the corresponding optical settings of the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' (e.g., change focal length(s) thereof).
Moreover, in an embodiment, the controller 130c can be configured to distinguish movements of the eye 20 or of the eye 30 that correspond to one or more gesture commands for changing an optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 lc or of the switchable lens 1 1 1c' from movements of the eye 20 or eye 30 that do not correspond to a gesture command for changing an optical setting. As described above, the controller 130c can correlate a gesture command (detected by the sensors 190c or 190c' and received as one or more signals from the sensors 190c or 190c' by the controller 130c) to an optical setting selected by the subject 70 for the switchable lens 1 1 lc or switchable lens 11 1 c', such as to switch the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' to the previously set optical setting (e.g., to the optical setting selected and set by the controller 130c for the switchable lenses 1 1 1c, 1 1 1c' based on the determined or estimated change in vergence between the eyes 20 30 (e.g., from the optical setting that was selected by the controller 130c without a command from the subject 70).
In an embodiment, the fields-of-view 195c or 195c' can be configured such that the sensors 190c or sensors 190c', respectively, can capture blinking of the eye 20 or eye 30. As mentioned above, a selected sequence of blinks of the eye 20 or of the eye 30 can correspond to a command for switching an optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' . Hence, for example, the controller 130c can receive signals from the sensors 190c or sensors 190c' and can correlate the signals received from the sensors 190c or sensors 190c' to one or more commands for changing to a selected optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' . In an embodiment, as described above, responsive to the signals received from the sensors 190c or input sensors 190c', the controller 130c can change optical setting of the switchable lens 1 1 1c or switchable lens 1 1 1c' . Additionally or alternatively, the selected movements of the eye 20 or eye 30 or movement patterns can correspond to a command for changing to a selected optical setting. In any event, for example, responsive tone or more inputs or commands received from the subject, such as audible or gesture inputs or commands, the controller 130c can be configured to switch the switchable lens 1 11c or switchable lens 11 1c' from a first optical setting to another optical setting (e.g., to a previous optical setting or to a different optical setting, generally).
In an embodiment shown in FIGS. 11A-11B, the fields-of-view 195c and 195c' are oriented generally horizontally relative to the eyes 20, 30. It should be appreciated, however, that positions of the cameras of the sensors 190c, 190c' and the orientation of the corresponding fields-of-view 195c and 195c' can vary from one embodiment to the next. FIG. 12 illustrates a switchable lens system lOOd, according to an embodiment. Except as otherwise described herein, the switchable lens system lOOd and its elements and components can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein (e.g., similar to or the same as the switchable lens system 100c (FIGS. 12A-12B)).
In an embodiment, the switchable lens system lOOd can include switchable lens device HOe that can have sensors 190d and sensors 190d' (e.g., as described above, the sensors 190d and sensors 190d' can include one or more cameras). In the illustrated embodiment, fields-of-view 195d and 195d', of the corresponding sensors 190d, 190d', can be aligned generally vertically relative to the eye 20 and eye 30, respectively. For example, similar to the fields-of-view 190c, 190c' (FIGS. 11A-11B), the input sensors 190d or sensors 190d' can capture movements of one or more portions of the eye 20 or eye 30 (respectively), which can correspond to one or more commands for switching switchable lens 1 1 lc or switchable lens 1 1 lc' to a selected optical setting.
As mentioned above, the elements or components of the switchable lens system can be positioned externally to the switchable lens device. FIG. 8 illustrates a switchable lens system lOOe, according to an embodiment. Except as described herein, the switchable lens system lOOe and its elements and components can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein. In the illustrated embodiment, the switchable lens system lOOe can include switchable lens device 1 lOe that includes switchable lens l l le and switchable lens l l le', which can be positioned in front of the eye 20 and eye 30, respectively.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens system lOOe can include sensor 190e that can be positioned externally to the switchable lens device HOe. For example, the sensor 190e can include at least one camera that can be positionable such that the field-of-view 195e of the camera of the sensor 190e can capture movement of one or more parts of the subject 70. For example, the field-of-view 195e can be suitable to capture movement of the eye 20 or eye 30 of the subject, size of the pupil of the eye 20 or eye 30, light reflected from the retina of the eye 20 or eye 30, level or intensity of ambient light surrounding the subject 70, etc., and can generate one or more signals responsive thereto, as described above. In an embodiment, the controller can receive one or more signals from the sensor 190e and can determine one or more focus-related characteristics based on the received signals. Moreover, in an embodiment, the field-of-view 195e can be suitable to capture movement of the eyelid of the eye 20 or eye 30 of the subject, movement of the subject' s head, hand, or other body parts, etc. As described above, for example, movement of the eye 20 or eye 30 (e.g., movement of the respective eyelids, such as blinking) of the subject 70 can be received as one or more gesture commands or can be correlated to one or more commands for switching the switchable lens l l le or switchable lens l l le' to a selected optical setting. Moreover, in an embodiment, one or more additional or alternative movements of the subject 70 can be correlated with one or more selected optical settings (e.g., movement of the hand, arm, mouth, etc., can be correlated to a command for a selected optical setting). Hence, for example, the subject 70 can provide any number of suitable inputs to the controller via one or more selected movements, to select a suitable optical setting for the switchable lens 1 1 le or switchable lens 1 1 le'.
In an embodiment, the sensor 190e can include one or more audio sensors (e.g., as described above). Hence, for example, the sensor 190e can receive or detect one or more audio inputs from the subject 70 and can generate one or more signals responsive to the detected audible inputs from the subject 70. For example, as described above, the controller can receive one or more signals from the sensor 190e, which can be related to the audible input provided by the subject 70, and can switch or direct switching of the switchable lens 1 1 le or switchable lens 1 1 le' at least in part based on the signals received from the sensor 190e.
Generally, the sensor 190e can be positioned at any suitable location (e.g., relative to the subject 70 or relative to the switchable lens device HOe). In an embodiment, the sensor 190e can be positioned on or near a monitor, television, etc., in a manner that can facilitate detection or sensing of the inputs provided by the subject 70. Additionally or alternatively, the sensors 190e can be operably coupled to or integrated with a device that can be carried by the subject 70 (e.g., in a smart phone).
As discussed above, the switchable lens can be included in any number of suitable optical devices that can be used or worn by the subject. FIG. 9 is a schematic side view of a switchable lens system lOOg that includes switchable lens devices HOg, 1 10g' configured as contact lenses and positioned on the respective eyes 20 and 30, according to an embodiment. Except as otherwise described herein, the switchable lens system lOOg and its elements and components can be similar to or the same as any of the switchable lens systems described herein. For example, the switchable lens devices HOg, 1 10g' of the switchable lens system lOOg can include corresponding switchable lenses l l lg and n ig'.
In an embodiment, the switchable lens device 1 lOg can include a controller 130g, a sensor 190g, and a communication device 160g. For example, the sensor 190g can be operably coupled to the controller 130g (e.g., as described above) and can receive or detect one or more inputs from the subject. In an embodiment, the sensor 190g can include a microphone, one or more acceleration or motion detectors (e.g., accelerometers), an optical detector, combinations thereof, etc. For example, the sensor 190g can detect one or more inputs, events, or conditions related to a suitable change to the optical setting of the switchable lens l l lg or switchable lens l l lg' (e.g., related to change in vergence between the eyes 20, 30, as described above). Moreover, the sensor 190g can be configured to detect one or more audible or gesture inputs or commands from the subject.
In an embodiment, the communication device 160g can send one or more signals to the switchable lens device HOg' (e.g., one or more switching signals). The communication device 160g can be operably coupled to another controller or to an input/output interface of a controller (e.g., to a personal electronic device) and can receive signals therefor or send signals thereto. For example, the communication device 160g can receive one or more inputs from an external controller (e.g., from a personal electronic device on the subject) and, responsive thereto, can send one or more signals to the controller 130g. For example, personal electronic device of the subject can detect one or more gesture or audible inputs or commands provided by the subject and can send one or more signals to the communication device 160g responsive thereto. In an embodiment, as described above, the controller 130g can receive one or more signals from the communication device 160g (e.g., corresponding or responsive to the signals received from the external controller, such as personal electronic device) and can generate one or more switching signals from the switchable lens 11 lg or 1 1 lg' .
As described above, the subject can provide one or more gesture or audible inputs that the controller can correlate to or interpret as a command for changing optical setting of the switchable lenses (e.g., for switching to a previous or another optical setting). It should be appreciated, however, that the switchable lens system or switchable lens device can be configured to receive any number of suitable inputs from the subject. For example, the switchable lens system or switchable lens device can include or can be operably coupled to any number of suitable input devices, such as touch input devices (e.g., touch screen, push-button input devices, such as keyboards, etc.), which can receive input from the subject. For example, the controller of the switchable lens device can include or can be operably coupled to a push-button or a keyed input device and can be configured to switch or direct switching of the optical setting of the switchable lens responsive to input received from the input device (e.g., to a previous or another optical setting, as described above).
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a switchable lens system lOOj that includes a switchable lens device 1 lOj, according to an embodiment. In an embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the switchable lens device HOj can include or can be coupled to a communication device 200 (e.g., at least one receiver, transmitter, transceiver, or combinations thereof) that can receive data or instructions related to modification of the focal length(s) of one or more switchable lenses of the switchable lens device HOj . As described above, a switchable lens system can include the controller 130j (e.g., the controller 130j can receive one or more signals and can determine vergence rotation of the eye and/or suitable focal length for the switchable lenses of the switchable lens device 1 lOj). In an embodiment, the controller 130j can include I/O interface 220, processor 230, and memory 290 operably coupled together. In an embodiment, the controller 130j can include a database 250 (e.g., the database 390 and can have data stored in a storage memory of the controller 130j). For example, the controller 130j can store one or more parameters in the database 390 (e.g., the controller 130j can store training or tuning data in the database 390).
In an embodiment, a communication device 210 (e.g., at least one receiver, transmitter, transceiver, or combinations thereof) can be operably coupled to the controller 130j and/or integrated therewith. For example, the communication device 210 can be operably coupled to the communication device 200 (e.g., via wired or wireless
connection), such that the switchable lens device 1 lOj and the controller 130e can transmit and receive data from one another. In an embodiment, display 260 and/or input device 270 (e.g., physical or virtual keyboard, microphone, etc.) can be operably coupled to the controller 130j and/or integrated therewith. For example, a user (e.g., a subject using and/or wearing the switchable lens device 1 lOj) can enter input and/or data into the controller 130j, as described herein. Moreover, it should be appreciated that the controller 130j can be operably coupled to and/or incorporated with any number of suitable devices, such as personal electronic devices (e.g., personal computers, smart phones, tablets, etc.) and/or any other computing and/or input devices. It should be appreciated that any of the systems described herein (e.g., multi-focus lens systems, IOL systems, etc.) can have a similar or the same configuration as the system described above and illustrated in FIG. 10.
It will be understood that a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, or virtually any combination thereof can be used in the controllers described herein. In one embodiment, several portions of the subject matter described herein can be implemented via Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs), digital signal processors (DSPs), or other integrated formats. However, some aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein, in whole or in part, can be equivalently implemented in integrated circuits, as one or more programs running on one or more processors (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more microprocessors), as firmware, or as virtually any combination thereof. In addition, the reader will appreciate that the mechanisms of the subject matter described herein are capable of being distributed as a program product in a variety of forms, and that an illustrative embodiment of the subject matter described herein applies regardless of the particular type of signal bearing medium used to actually carry out the distribution. In a general sense, the various embodiments described herein can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by various types of electro-mechanical systems having a wide range of electrical components such as hardware, software, firmware, or virtually any combination thereof; and a wide range of components that can impart mechanical force or motion such as rigid bodies, spring or torsional bodies, hydraulics, and electro- magnetically actuated devices, or virtually any combination thereof. Consequently, as used herein "electro-mechanical system" includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry operably coupled with a transducer (e.g., an actuator, a motor, a piezoelectric crystal, etc.), electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of random access memory), electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, or optical-electrical equipment), and any non-electrical analog thereto, such as optical or other analogs.
In a general sense, the various aspects described herein which can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof can be viewed as being composed of various types of "electrical circuitry." Consequently, as used herein "electrical circuitry" includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of random access memory), and/or electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, or optical-electrical equipment). The subject matter described herein can be implemented in an analog or digital fashion or some combination thereof. The herein described components (e.g., steps), devices, and objects and the discussion accompanying them are used as examples for the sake of conceptual clarity. Consequently, as used herein, the specific exemplars set forth and the accompanying discussion are intended to be representative of their more general classes. In general, use of any specific exemplar herein is also intended to be representative of its class, and the non-inclusion of such specific components (e.g., steps), devices, and objects herein should not be taken as indicating that limitation is desired.
With respect to the use of substantially any plural and/or singular terms herein, the reader can translate from the plural to the singular and/or from the singular to the plural as is appropriate to the context and/or application. The various singular/plural permutations are not expressly set forth herein for sake of clarity.
The herein described subject matter sometimes illustrates different components contained within, or connected with, different other components. It is to be understood that such depicted architectures are merely exemplary, and that in fact many other architectures can be implemented which achieve the same functionality. In a conceptual sense, any arrangement of components to achieve the same functionality is effectively "associated" such that the desired functionality is achieved. Hence, any two components herein combined to achieve a particular functionality can be seen as "associated with" each other such that the desired functionality is achieved, irrespective of architectures or intermedial components. Likewise, any two components so associated can also be viewed as being "operably connected," or "operably coupled," to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated can also be viewed as being "operably couplable," to each other to achieve the desired functionality. Specific examples of operably couplable include but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components and/or wirelessly interactable and/or wirelessly interacting components and/or logically interacting and/or logically interactable components. In some instances, one or more components can be referred to herein as
"configured to." The reader will recognize that "configured to" or "adapted to" are synonymous and can generally encompass active-state components and/or inactive-state components and/or standby-state components, unless context requires otherwise.
While particular aspects of the present subject matter described herein have been shown and described, it will be apparent that, based upon the teachings herein, changes and modifications can be made without departing from the subject matter described herein and its broader aspects and, therefore, the appended claims are to encompass within their scope all such changes and modifications as are within the true spirit and scope of the subject matter described herein. Furthermore, it is to be understood that the invention is defined by the appended claims. In general, terms used herein, and especially in the appended claims (e.g., bodies of the appended claims) are generally intended as "open" terms (e.g., the term "including" should be interpreted as "including but not limited to," the term "having" should be interpreted as "having at least," the term "includes" should be interpreted as "includes but is not limited to," etc.). It will be further understood that if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is intended, such an intent will be explicitly recited in the claim, and in the absence of such recitation no such intent is present. For example, as an aid to understanding, the following appended claims can contain usage of the introductory phrases "at least one" and "one or more" to introduce claim recitations. However, the use of such phrases should not be construed to imply that the introduction of a claim recitation by the indefinite articles "a" or "an" limits any particular claim containing such introduced claim recitation to inventions containing only one such recitation, even when the same claim includes the introductory phrases "one or more" or "at least one" and indefinite articles such as "a" or "an" (e.g., "a" and/or "an" should typically be interpreted to mean "at least one" or "one or more"); the same holds true for the use of definite articles used to introduce claim recitations. In addition, even if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is explicitly recited, such recitation should typically be interpreted to mean at least the recited number (e.g., the bare recitation of "two recitations," without other modifiers, typically means at least two recitations, or two or more recitations). Furthermore, in those instances where a convention analogous to "at least one of A, B, and C, etc." is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense the convention (e.g., "a system having at least one of A, B, and C" would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). In those instances where a convention analogous to "at least one of A, B, or C, etc." is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense the convention (e.g., "a system having at least one of A, B, or C" would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). Virtually any disjunctive word and/or phrase presenting two or more alternative terms, whether in the description, claims, or drawings, should be understood to contemplate the possibilities of including one of the terms, either of the terms, or both terms. For example, the phrase "A or B" will be understood to include the possibilities of "A" or "B" or "A and B."
With respect to the appended claims, any recited operations therein can generally be performed in any order. Examples of such alternate orderings can include overlapping, interleaved, interrupted, reordered, incremental, preparatory, supplemental, simultaneous, reverse, or other variant orderings, unless context dictates otherwise. With respect to context, even terms like "responsive to," "related to," or other past-tense adjectives are generally not intended to exclude such variants, unless context dictates otherwise.
While various aspects and embodiments have been disclosed herein, the various aspects and embodiments disclosed herein are for purposes of illustration and are not intended to be limiting, with the true scope and spirit being indicated by the following claims.

Claims

1. A lens system, comprising:
a first acceleration sensor operably coupleable to a first eye of a subject;
a second acceleration sensor operably coupleable to a second eye of the subject; at least one switchable lens device sized and configured to be placed in the first eye of the subject, the at least one switchable lens device including at least one switchable lens configured to selectively switch between a first focal length and at least a second focal length that is less than the first focal length responsive to one or more switching signals; and
a controller operably coupled to the first acceleration sensor, the second acceleration sensor, and the at least one switchable lens device, the controller including control electrical circuitry configured to:
receive one or more first signals from the first acceleration sensor;
receive one or more second signals from the second acceleration sensor; and
generate the one or more switching signals for switching the at least one switchable lens from the first focal length to the second focal length or from the second focal length to the first focal length responsive at least partially to the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor and from the one or more second signals received from the second acceleration sensor.
2. The lens system of claim 1, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to:
determine one or more of a velocity of the first eye, an acceleration of the first eye, a velocity of the second eye, or an acceleration of the second eye at least partially based on the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor and the one or more second signals received from the second acceleration sensor; and
generate the one or more switching signals responsive at least partially to the determined one or more of a velocity of the first eye, an acceleration of the first eye, a velocity of the second eye, or an acceleration of the second eye.
3. The lens system of claim 1, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to: determine one or more of an angular velocity of the first eye, an angular acceleration of the first eye, an angular velocity of the second eye, or an angular acceleration of the second eye based on the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor and the one or more second signals received from the second acceleration sensor; and
generate the one or more switching signals responsive at least partially to one or more of the determined angular velocity of the first eye, the determined angular acceleration of the first eye, the determined angular velocity of the second eye, or the angular acceleration of the second eye.
4. The lens system of claim 1, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to:
determine one or more of a difference in angular position, a difference in angular velocity, or a difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye based on the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor and the one or more second signals received from the second acceleration sensor; and
generate the one or more switching signals responsive at least partially to one or more of the determined difference in angular position, the determined difference in angular velocity, or the determined difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye.
5. The lens system of claim 1, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to:
determine one or more of a change in the difference in angular position, a change in the difference in angular velocity, or a change in the difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye based on the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor and the one or more second signals received from the second acceleration sensor; and
generate the one or more switching signals responsive at least partially to one or more of the determined change in the difference in angular position, the determined change in the difference in angular velocity, or the determined change in the difference in angular acceleration between the first eye and the second eye.
6. The lens system of claim 1, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to determine convergence or divergence between the first eye and the second eye responsive to the at least partially to the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor.
7. The lens system of claim 1, wherein at least a portion of the controller, which receives the one or more first signals from the first acceleration sensor, is located externally relative to the subject.
8. The lens system of claim 1, further including a portable computing device including at least a portion of the controller, the portable computing device configured to receive the one or more first signals from the first acceleration sensor.
9. The lens system of claim 1, wherein the controller is located remotely from the at least one switchable lens device.
10. The lens system of claim 1, wherein the controller is mechanically coupled to the at least one switchable lens device.
11. The lens system of claim 1, wherein the first acceleration sensor is operably coupled to the controller via at least one of a radio frequency connection, an optical transmission connection, an ultrasonic connection, or an electrical-conductor connection.
12. The lens system of claim 1, further including:
a magnetic field source sized and configured to be placed in the first eye of the subject or in a second eye of the subject, the magnetic field source configured to establish an identifiable magnetic field having a predetermined orientation relative to the first eye; and
a sensor configured to detect a change in the established identifiable magnetic field corresponding to a vergence rotation between the first eye and the second eye, the sensor being configured to generate one or more detection outputs at least partially based on the detected change in the established magnetic field, the sensor being operably coupled to the controller.
13. The lens system of claim 12, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to generate the one or more switching signals responsive at least partially to one or more detection outputs at least partially based on the detected change in the established magnetic field.
14. The lens system of claim 13, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to:
determine convergence or divergence between the first eye and the second eye at least partially responsive to one or more of the velocity of the first eye or the acceleration of the first eye and at least partially based on the detected change in the established magnetic field; and
generate the one or more switching signals responsive to the determined convergence or divergence between the first eye and the second eye.
15. The lens system of claim 1, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to differentiate at least one noise signal of the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor from at least one detection signal of the one or more first signals received from the first acceleration sensor.
16. The lens system of claim 1, further including an intraocular device that includes the at least one switchable lens device.
17. The lens system of claim 1, further including a contact lens that includes the at least one switchable lens device.
18. The lens system of claim 1, further including one or more physiological sensors positionable and configured to detect one or more physiological characteristics of the subject, the one or more physiological sensors operably coupled to electronic circuitry of the controller, and the control electrical circuitry configured to generate the one or more switching signals for switching the at least one switchable lens from the first focal length to the second focal length or from the second focal length to the first focal length responsive at least partially to one or more signals received from the one or more physiological sensors.
19. The lens system of claim 18, wherein the one or more physiological sensors include one or more of a glucose sensor, an electrolyte sensor, a heart rate sensor, a pulse sensor, an oxygen sensor, a temperature sensor, or a moisture sensor.
20. A lens system, comprising:
at least one switchable lens device including at least one switchable lens configured to selectively switch between a first optical setting and at least a second optical setting;
one or more sensors configured to detect at least one focus-related characteristic of one or more of a first eye or a second eye of the subject or at least one focus-related characteristic of an environment proximate to the subject;
a controller operably coupled to the one or more sensors and operably coupled to the at least one switchable lens device, the controller including control electrical circuitry configured to:
receive one or more sensor signals from the one or more sensors;
direct sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more received sensor signals;
receive one or more inputs from the subject; and
after directing sensor-based switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the second optical setting, direct override switching of the at least one switchable lens from the at least a second optical setting to the first optical setting at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject.
21. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the control electrical circuitry is configured to direct override switching of the at least one switchable lens from the at least a second optical setting to the first optical setting based on comparison of at least one of the one or more inputs to one or more approved inputs.
22. The lens system of claim 21, wherein the one or more approved inputs are based on a type of signal received by the controller and used to direct sensor-based switching.
23. The lens system of claim 21, wherein the one or more approved inputs are based on at least one environmental condition.
24. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the first optical setting includes a first focal length, and the at least a second optical setting includes a second focal length.
25. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the control electrical circuitry is operably coupled to an input device configured to receive the one or more inputs from the subject.
26. The lens system of claim 25, wherein the input device includes one or more of a button, a keyboard, a keypad, a microphone, a motion sensor, a camera, a photodetector, or a touch screen.
27. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the control electrical circuitry is configured to direct switching of the at least one switchable lens from the at least a second optical setting if the one or more inputs are received from the subject within a selected time period after the controller directed switching of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting responsive to the one or more sensor signals.
28. The lens system of claim 27, wherein the control electrical circuitry is operably coupled to an input device and configured to correlate the received input to the time period.
29. The lens system of claim 28, wherein the one or more setting conditions include at least one of an audible input received from the subject or motion input received from the subject.
30. The lens system of claim 20, further including an input device configured to detect one or more of an audio signal or motion of one or more body portions of the subject, and wherein the one or more inputs received from the subject include at least one of an audible input or a motion-based input.
31. The lens system of claim 30, wherein the audible input includes one or more of a verbal voice command, a non-verbal voice command, or a non-vocal audible command.
32. The lens system of claim 31, wherein the motion-based input includes one or more eye motion, eyelid closures, eyelid openings, or eye blinks.
33. The lens system of claim 20, further including an input device configured to receive a keyed input, and wherein the one or more inputs received from the subject include one or more presses of one or more keys to enter the keyed input.
34. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the at least one switchable lens device includes a contact lens.
35. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the at least one switchable lens device include spectacles sized and configured to be worn by the subject.
36. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the controller is included in a personal electronic device.
37. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the focus-related characteristic of an environment proximate to the subject comprises an ambient illumination level.
38. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to switch to the first optical setting from another optical setting responsive to one or more inputs received from the subject.
39. The lens system of claim 20, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to switch to the first optical setting from another optical setting responsive to one or more signals received from the one or more sensors or from an external device.
40. A lens system, comprising:
at least one switchable lens device including at least one switchable lens configured to selectively switch between a first optical setting and at least a second optical setting;
one or more sensors configured to detect at least one focus-related characteristic of one or more of the first eye or the second eye of the subject or of an environment proximate to the subject;
a controller operably coupled to the one or more sensors and operably coupled to the at least one switchable lens device, the controller including control electrical circuitry configured to:
receive one or more sensor signals from the one or more sensors; direct sensor-based switching an optical setting of the at least one switchable lens from the first optical setting to the at least a second optical setting or from the second optical setting to the first optical setting responsive to the one or more sensor signals, when a state setting is set to an enabled state, and to maintain the optical setting unchanged, when the state setting is set to a disabled state;
receive one or more inputs from the subject; and
after sensor-based switching the optical setting of the at least one switchable lens, at least partially responsive to the one or more inputs received from the subject, change the state setting between a disabled state and an enabled state.
41. The lens system of claim 40, wherein the control electrical circuitry is operably coupled to an input device and configured to correlate received input to the time period.
42. The lens system of claim 41, wherein the control electrical circuitry is operably coupled to an input device and configured to correlate input received from the input device to the time period.
43. The lens system of claim 40, wherein the control electrical circuitry is configured to change from the enabled state to the disabled state if at least one input of the one or more inputs received from the subject is received at the controller within a selected time period after changing the optical setting between the first optical setting and the second optical setting.
44. The lens system of claim 43, wherein the control electrical circuitry is operably coupled to an input device and configured to correlate input received from the input device to the time period.
45. The lens system of claim 40, further including an input device configured to detect one or more of an audio signal or a motion of one or more body portions of the subject, and wherein the one or more inputs received from the subject include at least one of an audible input or a motion-based input.
46. The lens system of claim 45, wherein the audible input includes one or more of a verbal voice command, a non-verbal voice command, or a non-vocal audible command.
47. The lens system of claim 46, wherein the motion-based input includes one or more eye motion, eyelid closures, eyelid openings, or eye blinks.
48. The lens system of claim 40, further including an input device configured to receive a keyed input, and wherein the one or more inputs received from the subject include one or more presses of one or more keys to enter the keyed input.
49. The lens system of claim 40, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to switch to the first optical setting from another optical setting responsive to one or more inputs received from the subject.
50. The lens system of claim 40, wherein the control electrical circuitry of the controller is configured to switch to the first optical setting from another optical setting responsive to one or more signals received from the one or more sensors or from an external device.
EP17851451.9A 2016-09-16 2017-09-13 Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods Withdrawn EP3512462A4 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/267,526 US10444541B2 (en) 2016-09-16 2016-09-16 Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods
US15/358,843 US20180143455A1 (en) 2016-11-22 2016-11-22 Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods
PCT/US2017/051346 WO2018052989A1 (en) 2016-09-16 2017-09-13 Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP3512462A1 true EP3512462A1 (en) 2019-07-24
EP3512462A4 EP3512462A4 (en) 2020-04-15

Family

ID=61619264

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP17851451.9A Withdrawn EP3512462A4 (en) 2016-09-16 2017-09-13 Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP3512462A4 (en)
CN (1) CN109982660A (en)
WO (1) WO2018052989A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11392188B1 (en) * 2021-01-06 2022-07-19 International Business Machines Corporation Maintaining smart contact lens power levels
US11927837B2 (en) * 2022-02-11 2024-03-12 Pixieray Oy Actively adaptive optical elements and apparatuses

Family Cites Families (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6851805B2 (en) * 1999-07-02 2005-02-08 E-Vision, Llc Stabilized electro-active contact lens
WO2006102495A2 (en) * 2005-03-24 2006-09-28 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Device and method for tracking eye gaze direction
JP5032775B2 (en) * 2006-02-17 2012-09-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Lens device
TW201234072A (en) * 2010-11-01 2012-08-16 Pixeloptics Inc Dynamic changeable focus contact and intraocular lens
US8919953B1 (en) * 2012-08-02 2014-12-30 Google Inc. Actuatable contact lenses
US9468372B2 (en) * 2013-02-28 2016-10-18 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Electronic ophthalmic lens with rear-facing pupil diameter sensor
US9778492B2 (en) * 2013-02-28 2017-10-03 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Electronic ophthalmic lens with lid position sensor
US9664916B2 (en) * 2013-03-15 2017-05-30 Johnson & Johnson Vision Care, Inc. Stereoscopic ophthalmic lens viewing sets
US10613356B2 (en) * 2013-09-09 2020-04-07 The General Hospital Corporation Remotely controllable lens device
CA2936334A1 (en) * 2014-01-08 2015-07-16 Elenza, Inc. Electro-optical monofocal intraocular lens
DE102014106036A1 (en) * 2014-04-30 2015-11-05 Karlsruher Institut für Technologie Means for controlling the accommodation requirement detection in an artificial accommodation system
US9861309B2 (en) * 2014-12-11 2018-01-09 Nxp Usa, Inc. Glucose monitoring system as control input to adjustable focal length lenses
US10307246B2 (en) * 2015-07-23 2019-06-04 Elwha Llc Intraocular lens devices, systems, and related methods

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2018052989A1 (en) 2018-03-22
CN109982660A (en) 2019-07-05
EP3512462A4 (en) 2020-04-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10324309B2 (en) Modifiable-focus lens devices, systems, and related methods
KR102322445B1 (en) Apparatus and method for measuring viewing distance
KR101979574B1 (en) Neuromuscular sensing for variable-optic electronic ophthalmic lens
US10345621B2 (en) Electronic ophthalmic device with extreme gaze angle detection
US10495902B2 (en) Systems and methods for ciliary muscle vibration detection
US10444541B2 (en) Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods
US10254565B2 (en) Ophthalmic devices and related methods
US10307246B2 (en) Intraocular lens devices, systems, and related methods
EP3512462A1 (en) Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods
WO2014199180A1 (en) Focal length adjustment
US11013404B2 (en) Adaptive configuration of an ophthalmic device
US10456241B2 (en) Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods
US20180143455A1 (en) Switchable lens devices, systems, and related methods
TW202002887A (en) Vergence detection method and system
US20200096787A1 (en) Ophthalmic communication with user method and system
US20200060810A1 (en) Adaptive configuration of an ophthalmic device
US20200124874A1 (en) Calibration of activation threshold method and system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE INTERNATIONAL PUBLICATION HAS BEEN MADE

PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20190416

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR

AX Request for extension of the european patent

Extension state: BA ME

DAV Request for validation of the european patent (deleted)
DAX Request for extension of the european patent (deleted)
STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION HAS BEEN WITHDRAWN

A4 Supplementary search report drawn up and despatched

Effective date: 20200313

RIC1 Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant

Ipc: G02C 7/02 20060101ALI20200309BHEP

Ipc: G02C 7/08 20060101ALI20200309BHEP

Ipc: G02C 7/04 20060101ALI20200309BHEP

Ipc: A61F 2/16 20060101AFI20200309BHEP

18W Application withdrawn

Effective date: 20200310